The Punjab: A Glimpse Question Answer Class 8 English Solutions Chapter 5 PSEB Solutions

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class English Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Class 8th English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse Question Answers

The Punjab: A Glimpse Class 8 Questions and Answers

Activity 1.

Look up the following words in a dictionary. You should seek the following information about the words and put them in your WORDS notebook.

1. Meaning of the words as used in the lesson (adjective/noun / verb, etc.)
2. Pronunciation (The teacher may refer to the dictionary or a mobile phone for correct pronunciation.)
3. Spellings

recognize pavilion zest invasion
brutal procession irrigate melodious
shrine pilgrimage architect manufacture

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

Vocabulary Expansion

Activity 2

Match the words under column A with their antonyms (विपरीतार्थक) under column B.

S. No. A B
1 exit fail
2 lead south
3 raise lower
4 order follow
5 broad slavery
6 north narrow
7 famous request
8 succeed disperse
9 freedom entrance
10 assemble notorious

Answer:
1. exist – entrance
2. lend – follow
3. raise – lower
4. Order – request
5. broad – narrow
6. north-south
7. famous – notorious
8. succeed – fail
9. freedom – slavery
10. assemble – disperse.

Activity 3.

The sentences given below have two blanks each. Two words are given in the brackets after each sentence.

Fill in the blanks choosing the correct word from the brackets.

1. With a …………… face she said, “My purse is ………………. (empty, black)
2. ………….. children have …………… hands. (small, little)
3. That ……………. young man has a ……………. wife. (handsome, beautiful)
4. The …………….. old man spoke in a ……………..voice. (feeble, weak)
5. The of ………….. of our school is a man of …………….. (principal, principles)
6. You should live in ……………. because …………… is strength. (union, unity)
7. He is a …………….. man with a round face and a …………….. forehead. (tall, high)
Answer:
1. blank, empty
2. little, small
3. handsome, beautiful
4. weak, feeble
5. principal, principles
6. unity, union
7. tall, high.

Learning to Read and Comprehend

Activity 4.

Answer each question briefly.

a.. What is special about Bhangra ?
भांगड़ा नृत्य के बारे में विशेष क्या है ?
Answer:
The Bhangra dance is full of energy. It shows the great zest for life of the Punjabis.

b. Why do you think that the Punjabis are self-respecting people ?
आप ऐसे क्यों सोचते हैं कि पंजाबी लोग स्वाभिमानी लोग हैं ?
Answer:
We can say that because Punjabis would never beg or show their back in battle field.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

c. What was Punjab’s role in the struggle for India’s Independence ?
भारत के स्वतन्त्रता संघर्ष में पंजाबियों का क्या योगदान था ?
Answer:
Lala Lajpat Rai, Bhagat Singh, Sukhdev, Udham Singh, Kartar Singh Sarabha and many other Punjabis sacrificed their lives for the sake of their motherland.

d. What did General O’Dwyer do at the Jallianwala Bagh in Amritsar ?
जनरल ओ’डायर ने अमृतसर के जलियांवाला बाग़ में क्या किया ?
Answer:
On April 13, 1919 about 20,000 people had gathered here for a public meeting.General Dyer ordered his riflemen to fire at the crowd.

e. Which states have benefitted from the Bhakra-Nangal Project ?
भाखड़ा-नंगल परियोजना से किन राज्यों को लाभ पहुंचा है ?
Answer:
Punjab, Haryana, Himachal Pradesh, Rajasthan and Gujarat have benefitted from this Project.

f. If. What is the religious importance of Anandpur Sahib ?
आनंदपुर साहिब का क्या धार्मिक महत्त्व है ?
Answer:
In Anandpur Sahib the Khalsa was founded by Guru Gobind Singh Ji. Lakhs of Sikhs gather here every year to celebrate the founding of the Khalsa.

g. Where is Chandigarh situated ? What is it known for ?
चंडीगढ़ कहां स्थित है ? यह किस लिए प्रसिद्ध है ?
Answer:
Chandigarh is situated at the foot of the Shivalik Hills. It is known for its “rose gardens.

h. What are Jalandhar and Ludhiana famous for ?
जालन्धर और लुधियाना किस बात के लिए प्रसिद्ध हैं ?
Answer:
Jalandhar is famous for its sports goods while Ludhiana is famous for its woollen hosiery industry.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

i. Who compiled the holy Sri Guru Granth Sahib ?
पवित्र श्री गुरु ग्रंथ साहिब का संकलन किसने किया ?
Answer:
Sri Guru Arjun Dev Ji, the fifth Guru of the Sikhs, compiled Sri Guru Granth Sahib.

j. What do you know about the holiest shrine of the Sikhs ?
आप सिक्खों के सबसे पवित्र धार्मिक स्थल के विषय में क्या जानते हैं ?
Answer:
Golden Temple of Amritsar is the holiest shrine of Sikhs. It is built in the middle of a tank. It has a golden dome on the top.

Activity 5

Write ‘true’ or ‘false’ for the following statements in the given space.

a. General O’Dwyer lived in Jallianwala Bagh. — False
b. Le Corbusier was a great Indian architect. — False
c. Bhagat Singh was hanged on 13 April 1919. — False
d. The Golden Temple has a tank all around it. — True
e. India became an independent country in 1947. — True
f. The Punjabis have faced many foreign invasions. — True
g. Guru Gobind Singh founded the Khalsa in 1669.– False
h. Lala Lajpat Rai is known as Shaheed-e-Azam of India .– False
i. The Bhakra Dam is 518 feet high and 740 feet wide. — False
j. Fifty per cent of India’s hosiery industry is in Ludhiana. — False
k. Dr. Rajendra Prasad was the President of India in 1953. — True
I. Chandigarh is situated on the left bank of the Sutlej River.– False

Activity 6

Tick (√) the correct choice to complete each sentence.

Question 1.
The Jallianwala Bagh massacre took place in ……
(a) 1919
(6) 1928
(c) 1947
(d) 1926.
Answer:
(a) 1919. (√)

Question 2.
The reorganisation of Punjab took place in …….
(a) 1947
(b) 1950
(c) 1966
(d). 1953.
Answer:
(c) 1966. (√)

Question 3.
Kulu and Manali are parts of …
(a) Haryana
(b) Himachal Pradesh
(c) Jammu and Kashmir
(d) Punjab.
Answer:
(b) Himachal Pradesh. (√)

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

Question 4.
Sri Guru Arjun Dev was …………….. of the Sikhs.
(a) the fifth Guru
(b) the sixth Guru
(c) the fourth Guru
(d) the tenth Guru.
Hint :
(a) the fifth Guru. (√)

Learning Language

Subject-Verb Agreement

1. A verb must agree with its subject, number and person i.e. when the subject is singular, the verb must also be singular. When the subject is plural, the verb must be plural. For example :
1. He plays cricket.
2. They play cricket.
3. I am sad.
4. We are sad.
5. A girl is running.
6. Girls are running.
7. A list of boys was prepared.
8. One of my friends has gone to the USA.

Let us look at some more aspects of how the verb should agree with the subject in a sentence.

2. If the subject consists of two or more singular nouns or pronouns joined by ‘and, It take a plural verb.
For example :
(i) Jolly and John were two brothers.
(ii) The poet and the dramatist are being honoured. (Two separate persons).
(iii) Kolkata, Mumbai, Chennai and Delhi are the most important cities of India.
(iv) He and I were present.

Exceptions:
(a) If the nouns refer to the same person or thing or express one idea, the verb is singular.
For example :
(i) The poet and dramatist is being honoured. (same person – one only)
(ii) My friend, philosopher and guide was invited to preside over the function. (same person one only)
(iii) Rice and curry is his favourite dish.
(iv) Slow and steady wins the race.
(v) Bread and butter is wholesome food.

(b) If two singular subjects joined by ‘and are qualified by ‘each’ or ‘every they take a singular verb.
For example :
(i) Every man and every woman desires happiness.
(ii) Each hour and each minute is important.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

3. Sigular subjects connected by ‘or’, ‘either – or’ and ‘neither – nor,’ are following by singular verb.
For example :
(a) No prize or trophy was given to him.
(b) Either Minesh or Parag has won the prize.
(c) Neither Sanjeev nor Amit has gone to school today.

4. When the subjects connected by ‘or’ or ‘nor are of different numbers, the plural subject should be written in the last and it is followed by a plural verb.
For example :
(a) Either Raghu or his parents are to blame.
(b) Neither Parul nor her friends have joined the college.
(c) Neither the headmaster nor the teachers were present there.

5. When the subjects connected by ‘nor’ or ‘or’ ate of different persons, the verb agrees in person with the subject nearest to it.
For example :
(a) Neither you nor Rosy is responsible for our defeat.
(b) Neither you not Rahul seems to be interested in this plan.
(c) Neither Neelu nor I have any money to buy a house.

6. When the subject consists of two nouns or pronouns joined by ‘with’ or ‘as well as’, the verb agrees with the first of them.
For examples :
(a) All the students with their teacher, were present at the show.
(b) He with all his friends, was ready to do or die.
(c) They as well as I are sick of his behaviour.
(d) Good leaders as well as a responsible public are essential for the success of democracy

7. When two subjects are connected by ‘not only … ‘but also’, the verb agrees with the second subject.
For example :
(a) Not only the master but his servants have also been badly wounded.
(b) Not only the soldiers but the captain has also been arrested.

8. When the subject is the formal ‘there’, the verb agrees with the real subject that follows it.
For example :
(a) There is no hope of his success.
(b) There were many difficulties to be removed.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

9. ‘Either’, ‘neither’, ‘each, “.everyone’, ‘one of the take a singular verb.
For example :
(a) Neither of the two books was interesting.
(b) Everyone of these workers is an expert.
(c) One of the students is differently abled.
(d) Each of these two girls is intelligent.
(e) Either of these two boys is fit for this work.

10. Nouns which are plural. in form but singular in meaning should be followed by singular verbs.
For example :
(a) Mathematics is my favourite subject.
(b) Politics is a dirty game.
(c) The wages of sin is death.
(d) The news is too good to be true.
(e) Gulliver’s Travels’ is an interesting book.

11. Collective noun (crew, jury, committee) is followed by a singular verb when the group is thought of as a single unit. But when individual members of the group are referred to, the plural verb is used.
For example :
(a) A committee was appointed to suggest some reforms.
(b) The committee were divided on the issue.
(c) The jury was unanimous in its verdict.
(d) The jury were divided in their opinions.

12. When the subject of a verb is a relative pronoun, the verb agrees in number and person with the antecedent of the relative pronoun.
For example :
(a) The boy, who always stands first, is my son.
(b) The time, which is lost, is lost forever.
(c) I, who am your friend, will certainly help you.
(d) This is one of the most interesting books that have (not has) ever appeared.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

13. When the subject is a sum of money considered as a whole, a singular verb is used. If the subject is a sum of money and it refers to the notes or coins considered separately, a plural verb is used.
For example :
(a) Hundred rupees is not a small amount.
(b) Hundred rupees were found in his purse.
(c) Five thousand rupees is a good price for this camera.
(d) There were fifty rupees in his pocket.
(e) There are ten silver rupees in my box.

Activity 7.

Select the correct verb from the brackets to fill in the blanks.

1. The tallest of these boys ………………. next door to me. (live, lives)
2. All the players in my team ……………… done well. (has, have)
3. The toys that were bought by Anil … ………….. really useful. (are, is)
4. He ……………… regularly. (walk, walks).
5. Slow and steady …… ………… the race. (win, wins)
6. Time and tide ……………… for none. (wait, waits)
7. Oil and water ……………. mix. (does not, do not).
8. Tobacco and alcohol ……………. injurious to health. (is, are)
9. Either Ashok or Rakesh ………………. done this mischief. (has, have)
10. Either you or he ……………… mistaken. (is, are)
11. Neither the judge nor the witnesses ……………… him. (believe, believes)
12. Neither the Captain nor the soldiers …………… been arrested. (has, have)
13. Either he or I …………….. wrong. (am, are)
14. He as well as you ………………. innocent. (is, are)
15. Each day and each hour …………….. its own importance. (has, have)
16. Either of these two proposals ………………. acceptable to me. (is, are)
17. The jury ………………. divided in their opinion. (was, were)
18. The assembly ………………. in session. (is, are).
19. I am the one who ……………. always stood for justice. (has, have)
20. This is one of the most difficult lessons that ……. …….. been taught. (has, have)
Answer:
1. lives
2. have
3. are
4. walks
5. wins
6. wait
7. do not
8. are
9. has
10. is
11. believe
12. been arrested
13. am
14. is
15. has
16. is
17. were
18. is
19. have
20. has.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

Activity 8.

Listen to the words spoken by your teacher. Each word will be spoken twice. You will repeat after her/him. The teacher must check the pronunciation from the dictionary.
Answer:
1. February
2. Wednesday
3. Clothes
4. Desk
5. Library
6. Suite
7. April
8. Arithmetic
9. Bear
10. Plumber
11. Cleanliness
12. Creature
13. Debris
14. Depot
15. Develop
16. Hotel
17. Photography
18. Democracy
19. Police
20. Tortoise

Learning to Write

Paragraph Writing

A paragraph is a group of sentences that are written on a topic. It requires unity, order, coherence amnd completeness of an idea. When we write a paragraph, we should focus on one idea. Let us write a paragraph on a ‘A Picnic’ we went for.

A School Picnic
Picnic — Look forward to — all excited — woke up early – packed food — reached in time — teachers accompanied — bus started — enjoyed – reached the spot – took swings – high spirits —- took lunch — great fun — journey back — reached home – a day worth – remembering.

Picnic is one thing that we all always look forward to. This time, it was announced that we would go on a school picnic to the local city garden. We were all very excited.

On the day of the picnic, I woke up early. My mother packed a lot of food items for me and my friends. We reached school in time to board the bus. Our English teacher and sports teacher were accompanying us. The bus started at 8 a.m. We enjoyed the journey and had great fun singing songs.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

Finally, we reached the garden. It was very peaceful there. The weather was also very pleasant. We got busy on swings and started running and playing. We were all in high spirits. In the afternoon, we had lunch. We shared our food with each other. After lunch, our teachers made us play many games. It was fun. We laughed and enjoyed ourselves. Soon it was evening and time to go back. We boarded the bus again and reached home by 7. It was a memorable day and I am going to cherish it forever.

Activity 9.

Write a paragraph on Our School Library using the hints given below :
Answer:
School a temple of learning–library the most useful place a big library in my school – more than 50,000 books – kept subjectwise – story books and comics-newspapers and magazines – librarian very helpful and kind – enjoy going to the library

Our School Library

A school is a temple of learning. A library is an altar in it. My school too has a big library. It is housed in a cornor. It has about 50,000 books in it. The books are kept subject-wise. They are kept in almirahs with glass-panes. The library has a number of newspapers and magazines too.

They are in Punjabi, Hindi and English. We can borrow books from the library. But no student can keep a book for more than fifteen days. The librarian is very helpful, kind and gentle. But he is very strict. He maintains perfect silence and discipline in the library. We go to the library thrice a week. We read newspapers and magazines. The library is really very useful to all of us.

Activity 10.

Write a paragraph on ‘An Indian Farmer’ looking at the hints given below :
Answer:
India land of villages–agriculture major profession-agriculture is lifeline of Indian economy-keeps the Indian economy prospering – the citizens with food-grows food grains, vegetables and fruits-grows cotton – works from morning to evening-provides employment – 40% of Indian farmers – requires a lot of labour – difficult task requires discipline and patience-grows crops for our country – crop is his wealth – important place in society – backbone of India – very useful member of the society

An Indian Farmer India is a land of villages. Most of the villagers are farmers. Therefore agriculture plays the most important role in the Indian economy. It is called the lifeline of Indian economy. It keeps the economy of the country prospering. Agriculture provides the citizens with food. About 40% of Indian farmers get their livehood. It provides employment directly through farming to many other people also. On the whole Indian farmer and farming together keep our economy alive. Farmers work hard (Hera) labour in their fields and grow various crops. Therefore, Indian farmer enjoys an important place in the society. He is the backbone of India.

Comprehension of Passage

Read the following passage and answer the questions given below each :

(1) According to the history of Punjab, the Punjabis have faced all the foreign invasions boldly. During the struggle for India’s freedom, Punjab gave the country great heroes. They included patriots such as Lala Lajpat Rai, Bhagat Singh, Sukhdev, Udham Singh, Kartar Singh Sarabha and many others. We call Lala Lajpat Rai Sher-e-Punjab and Bhagat Singh Shaheed-e-Azam. All these brave sons of Punjab sacrificed their lives for their country. Lala Lajpat Rai died as a result of the brutal lathi charge while he was leading a procession against the British in 1928. Bhagat Singh, Sukhdev and Rajguru were hanged for raising their voice against the British cruelties. Bhagat Singh was just 26 years old then.

1. What led to Lala Lajpat Rai’s death?
लाला लाजपत राय की मृत्यु किस कारण हुई ?

2. Name three freedom fighters who were hanged.
तीन स्वतंत्रता सेनानियों के नाम बताओ जिन्हें फांसी दी गई।

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) Bhagat Singh was 16 years old when he was hanged.
जब भगत सिंह को फांसी दी गई उस समय उनकी आयु केवल 16 साल थी।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

(b) Lala Lajpat Rai died in 1928.
तीन स्वतंत्रता सेनानियों के नाम बताओ जिन्हें फांसी दी गई

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Lala Lajpat Rai was leading a procession
(b) Bhagat Singh, Sukhdev and Rajguru were hanged for ……….
Or
Match the words with their meanings :

(i) crueltics photographs
(ii) portraits patriots
atrocities

Answer:
1. The British lathi-charge on Lalaji led to his death.
2. Bhagat Singh, Sukhdev and Rajguru.
3.
(a) False
(b) True.
4.
(a) Lala Lajpat Rai was lending a procession against the British in 1928.
(b) Bhagat Singh, Sukhdev and Rajguru were hanged for raising voice against the British cruelties.
Or
(i) cruelties – atrocities
(ii) portraits – photographs.

(2) Mr Mathew told Chinta. ‘This is the famous Jallanwala Bagh of Amritsar and these are Bullet marks. On 31 April 1919, a crowd of around 20,000 people had gathered for a public meeting here. They included men, women and children. The British General O’Dwyer came there with his armed soliders. He blocked all the exit point. Then he ordered his men to start firing without giving any warning to the people gathered there. About 1000 people were killed and more than 1500 were wounded.”

1. What happened in Jalliandwala Bagh on April 13, 1919 ?
13 अप्रैल 1919 को जलियांवाला बाग में क्या घटना घटी

2. For what purpose had the people gathered in Jallianwala Bagh ?
लोग जलियांवाला बाग में किस उद्देश्य से इकट्ठे हुए थे ?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :

(a) The park had no exit.
पार्क से बाहर जाने का कोई रास्ता नहीं था।

(b) The British General O’Dwyer came there with his riflemen.
ब्रिटिश जनरल डायर अपने बंदूकधारियों के साथ वहां आया।

4. Complete the following sentence according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Dyer blocked …………
(b) The crowd gathered at the Bagh included ………….
Or
Match the words with their meanings :

(i) blocked injured
(ii) wounded closed
killed

Answer:
1. On 13 April, 1919, the British General O’Dwyer ordered his riflemen to fire at the crowd. About 1000 people were killed and more than 1500 were wounded.
2. The people had gathered for a public meeting.
3.
(a) False
(b) True
4.
(a) Dyer blocked all the exist points.
(b) The crowd gathered at the Bagh included men, women and children.
Or
(i) blocked – closed
(ii) wounded – injured.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

(3) “Sir, they say this temple is surrounded by water”, said Chintu. “Yes, it is built in the middle of a square tank. To reach the temple, there is a 60-metre long marble path. This path has marble railings on both sides. The temple is double-storeyed. It has a golden dome on the top. The marble slabs used in the construction of the temple have on them fine artistic engravings. The inner walls are decorated with precious stones. They have on them priceless paintings and other works of art. On the ground floor, under the dome-shaped roof lies Sri Guru Granth Sahib. It is the holy book of the Sikhs.” explained Mr. Mathew. “Do you know it was Sri Guru Arjun Dev, the fifth Guru of the Sikhs, who compiled this holy book ?” asked Mr. Mathew.

1. How can the temple be reached ?
मंदिर तक कैसे पहुँचा जा सकता है ?

2. What lies on the ground floor, under the dome-shaped roof?
गुम्बदाकार छत के नीचे भूतल पर क्या विराजमान है ?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book
(a) Marble slabs have been used for the decoration of the temple.
मंदर की सजावट के लिए संगमरमर की पट्टिकाएं प्रयोग में लाई गई हैं।

(b) The path has a marble railing on one side.
मार्ग के एक ओर संगमरमर का जंगला है।

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Sri Guru Granth Sahib was compiled by ……..
(b) The inner walls of the temple are decorated with …………
Or
Match the words with their meanings :

(i) decorated destroyed
(ii) precious beautified
Costly

Answer:
1. It can be reached by a 60-metre long marble path.
2. Sri Guru Granth Sahib, the holy book of the Sikhs, lies on the ground floor under the dome-shaped roof.
3.
(a) True
(b) False
4.
(a) Sri Guru Granth Sahib was compiled by Sri Guru Arjun Dev, the fifth Guru of the Sikhs.
(b) The inner walls of the temple are decorated with precious stones.
Or
(i) decorated – beautified
(ii) precious – costly.

(4) Mr Mathew replied, “Yes, this is Chandigarh. This beautiful city is situated at the foot of the Shivalik Hills. It was designed by a famous French architect, Le Corbusier. Being very close to the hills, Chandigarh has a calm and pleasant atmosphere. The Rose Garden of Chandigarh is world famous. The city was formally declared open in October 1953 by Dr Rajendra Prasad, the former President of India.“

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

1. Where is Chandigarh situated ?
चण्डीगढ़ कहां स्थित है ?

2. When and by whom was it formally declared open ?
इसका औपचारिक रूप से शुभारम्भ कब और किसके द्वारा किया गया ?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) Chandigarh has a calm and pleasant atmosphere.
चण्डीगढ़ का वातावाण शान्ति और सुटावाना है

(b) Stone gardens of Chandigarh are world famous. :
चण्डीगढ़ के पत्थर के बाग जगत् प्रसिद्ध हैं।

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Le Corbusier was
(b) Chandigarh is a ………….
Or
Match the words with their meanings :

(i) pleasant well-known
(ii) famous fine
helpful

Answer:
1. Chandigarh is situated at the foot of the Shivalik Hills.
2. It was formally declared open in October 1953 by the then President of India,Dr. Rajendra Prasad.
3.
(a) True
(b) False
4.
(a) Le Corbusier was a famous French architect.
(b) Chandigarh is a beautiful city.
Or
(i) pleasant-fine.
(ii) famous-well-known.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

Use‌ ‌of‌ ‌Words‌ ‌and‌ ‌Phrases‌ ‌in‌ ‌Sentences‌ ‌

1. alms (charity, small, amounts received by way of begging) – The beggar stretched his hand out for alms.
2. celebrate – (engage in festivities) – I celebrated my birthday in a hotel.
3. compile – (to collect and arrange into a book) -Sri Guru Granth Sahib was compiled by Sri Guru Arjun Dev Ji.
4. curb (put control or check on, obstruct) – His arrest curbed his liberty in a big way.
5. distributary-(a narrow waterway to distribute canal or river water for irrigation, छोटी नदी/वितरिका A network of distributaries irrigates the fields in this state
6. executed – (done to death/hanged,) – The murderer was executed on Sunday.
7. exuberance (lively spirit, ) – The Bhangra shows the exuberance of the people of Punjab.
8. invasion – (attack) -India faced many invasions by the foreigners.
9. mowed down – (killed,) – Hundreds of freedom fighters were mowed down in the firing.
10. prominent – (well known) – My uncle is a prominent political figure.
11. precious – (of great value) – Gold is a precious metal.
12. recognize – (identify/know somebody again) – Do you recognize this picture ?
13. successive – (continuously/one after the other) – He had to keep awake for three successive nights.
14. vigorous – (fast and active/full of spirit and movement) – He made vigorous efforts to achieve his goal.
15. vitality – (liveliness) – The dance was full of life and vitality.

Word Meanings

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab A Glimpse 1PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab A Glimpse 2

The Punjab: A Glimpse Summary in Hindi

Balle, Balle ! …………… in the pavilion.

बल्ले, बल्ले ! ओह् बल्ले बल्ले ! मि० मैथ्यू अपने छात्रों को अमृतसर की यात्रा पर ले गए। मि० मैथ्यू ने पंजाब पैवेलियन (पंडाल) के सामने भांगड़ा नर्तकों की ओर इशारा करते हुए कहा, “बच्चो, तुम पंजाब के इस प्रसिद्ध लोकनृत्य को अवश्य पहचान गए होंगे।”
बच्चों ने उत्तर दिया, “हाँ, श्रीमान् जी, हम यह लोक नृत्य इस वर्ष के गणतंत्र दिवस के समारोह में देख चुके हैं।” मि० मैथ्यू ने कहा, “यह नृत्य जोश से भरा है। यह पंजाबियों के जीवन के प्रति अति उत्साह को दर्शाता है। पंजाबी स्वाभिमानी और बहुत ही परिश्रमी लोग होते हैं। तुम इन्हें गलियों में भीख माँगते नहीं देखोगे। वे बहुत बहादुर लड़ाई के मैदान में कभी भी अपनी पीठ नहीं दिखाते।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

पंजाब के इतिहास के अनुसार पंजाब के लोगों ने सभी विदेशी आक्रमणकारियों का दृढ़ता से सामना किया । भारत के स्वतंत्रता संग्राम में पंजाब ने देश को महान नायक दिए। उनमें लाला लाजपत राय, भगत सिंह, सुखदेव, ऊधम सिंह, करतार सिंह सराभा जैसे तथा कई अन्य देशभक्त शामिल थे। हम लाला लाजपत राय को शेर-ए-पंजाब तथा भगत सिंह को शहीद-ए-आजम कहकर पुकारते हैं। पंजाब के इन सभी वीर पुत्रों ने अपनी मातृभूमि के लिए अपने प्राणों की आहुति दे दी। लाला लाजपत राय की मृत्यु 1928 में अंग्रेजों के विरुद्ध एक जलूस का नेतृत्व करते समय उन पर किए गए निर्दयतापूर्ण लाठीचार्ज के परिणामस्वरूप हुई। भगत सिंह, सुखदेव और राजगुरू को अंग्रेजों के अत्याचारों के विरुद्ध आवाज़ उठाने पर फांसी पर लटका दिया गया। भगत सिंह उस समय केवल 26 वर्ष के थे। बच्चो! तुम पंडाल में इन सभी स्वतंत्रता सेनानियों के चित्र देखोगे।”

“Sir, what is ….. work of the Punjabis.”

चिंटू ने पूछा, ” श्रीमान् जी, यह भवन, कौन सा है जिसकी दीवारें पूरी तरह निशानों से भरी पड़ी हैं ?” मि० मैथ्यू ने चिंटू को बताया, “यह अमृतसर का प्रसिद्ध जलियाँवाला बाग़ है और ये गोलियों के निशान हैं। यहाँ 13 अप्रैल, 1919 को लगभग 20,000 लोगों की एक भीड़ सार्वजनिक सभा के लिए यहां एकत्रित हुई थी। इसमें स्त्री, पुरुष तथा बच्चे शामिल थे। ब्रिटिश जनरल ओ’डायर अपने बन्दूकधारियों के साथ वहाँ पहुँचा। उसने बाहर निकलने के सभी रास्ते बंद कर दिए। बिना कोई चेतावनी दिए उसने अपने बंदूकधारियों को भीड़ पर गोली चलाने का आदेश दे दिया। लगभग एक हज़ार लोग मारे गए और पंद्रह सौ से अधिक लोग घायल हुए।”

मि० मैथ्यू ने अपने छात्रों को 1947 के बटवारे के बारे में बताया। उन्होंने बताया “पंजाब को 1947 में भारत की स्वतंत्रता की पूर्व संध्या के समय अनेक कष्ट उठाने पड़े। यहाँ भयंकर खून-खराबा हुआ। हज़ारों लोगों को अपने घरों को छोड़ना पड़ा और शरणार्थियों की तरह रहना पड़ा। फिर भी, वीर पंजाबियों ने कड़ा परिश्रम किया और जीवन की नये सिरे से शुरुआत की। उन्होंने राज्य के पुनर्निर्माण में एक महान् भूमिका निभाई। उन्होंने कड़ी मेहनत और कृषि कौशल से पंजाब को भारत का अन्न भण्डार बना दिया। वे देश में हरित क्रांति लाए। शीघ्र ही भारत एक विकासशील देश बन गया और इसका मुख्य कारण पंजाबियों का कड़ा परिश्रम है।

“Sir wasn’t Punjab. ………….. modern India.”

राजू ने पूछा, “श्रीमान् जी, क्या उस समय पंजाब का विभाजन फिर से नहीं किया गया था जब इसमें से हरियाणा राज्य का निर्माण किया गया था ?” मि० मैथ्यू ने बताया, “राजू, तुम ठीक कह रहे हो। 1966 में पंजाबी भाषा और हिन्दी भाषा के आधार पर पंजाब राज्य का पुनर्गठन किया गया। पंजाब के कुछ पहाड़ी क्षेत्र जैसे कि लाहौल-स्पीति, कुल्लू एवं मनाली की घाटियाँ, कांगड़ा, डल्हौज़ी और शिमला हिमाचल प्रदेश के साथ मिला दिए गए। चण्डीगढ़ को पंजाब एवं हरियाणा दोनों की सांझी राजधानी बना दिया गया। उसे केंद्र शासित प्रदेश घोषित कर दिया गया।”

“पुनर्गठित पंजाब नवंबर 1966 में अस्तित्व में आया। अब इसके पश्चिम में पाकिस्तान, उत्तर में जम्मू और कश्मीर, उत्तर-पूर्व में हिमाचल प्रदेश और दक्षिण में हरियाणा और राजस्थान हैं।”राजू ने कहा, “श्रीमान् जी, यहाँ एक बांध का मॉडल (नमूना) है। मेरे विचार से यह प्रसिद्ध भाखड़ा बांध है।”

मि० मैथ्यू ने कहा, “राजू, तुम ठीक कह रहे हो। यह बांध 740 फुट ऊँचा है। इसकी लम्बाई 518 मीटर है और यह 9 मीटर चौड़ा है। इसके जलाशय जिसे गोबिन्द सागर के नाम से जाना जाता है, इसमें 9 बिलियन क्यूषिक मीटर पानी इकट्ठा किया जा सकता है। इसका उपयोग हिमाचल प्रदेश, पंजाब तथा हरियाणा की 10 मिलियन एकड़ भूमि की सिंचाई के लिए किया जाता है। भाखड़ा और नंगल विद्युत केंद्रों में पैदा होने वाली बिजली को हिमाचल प्रदेश, पंजाब, हरियाणा, राजस्थान और गुजरात राज्यों को दिया जाता है। पंडित नेहरू ने भाखड़ा बांध को आधुनिक भारत का मंदिर कहा है।”

“Sir, I can ………………….. asked Mr. Mathew.?”

विक्की ने कहा, “श्रीमान् जी, मुझे गुरूवाणी के मधुर स्वर सुनाई दे रहे हैं। पास में अवश्य ही कोई गुरुद्वारा होगा।”मि० मैथ्यू ने कहा, “ठीक है, हम अमृतसर के श्री दरबार साहिब के निकट हैं। यह सिखों का सबसे पवित्र धार्मिक स्थल है।”
चिंटू ने कहा, “कहते हैं कि यह मंदर जल से घिरा हुआ है।” मि० मैथ्यू ने बताया, “हां, यह एक वर्गाकार सरोवर के बीच में बना है। मंदर में पहुँचने के लिए 60 मी० लम्बा संगमरमर का मार्ग बना हुआ है। इस मार्ग के दोनों ओर संगमरमर की रेलिंग (जंगला) है। मंदर दो मंजिला है। इसके शीर्ष पर एक सुनहरी गुंबद है। मंदर के निर्माण में लगाई गईं संगमरमर की पट्टिकाओं पर कलात्मक नक्काशी की गई है। अंदर की दीवारें कीमती पत्थरों से सुसज्जित हैं। उन पर अनमोल चित्रकारी और अन्य कलाकारियां की गई हैं। भूतल पर गुंबदाकार छत के नीचे ‘श्री गुरु ग्रंथ साहिब’ विराजमान हैं। यह सिक्खों का पवित्र ग्रंथ है। मि० मैथ्यू ने कहा, “क्या आप जानते हैं कि इस पवित्र पुस्तक का संकलन सिखों के पाँचवें गुरु अर्जुन देव जी ने किया था ?”

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

“Anandpur Sahib ……… President of India.”

“आनंदपुर साहिब सिखों का एक अन्य तीर्थ-स्थल है। इसकी स्थापना श्री गुरु तेग बहादुर जी ने की थी। यह सतलुज नदी के बायें किनारे पर स्थित एक छोटा सा शहर है। यहां हर साल लाखों सिख ‘खालसा’ जिसकी स्थापना 1699 में गुरु गोबिन्द सिंह जी ने की थी, का स्थापना दिवस मनाने के लिए इकट्ठे होते हैं।” राजू ने पूछा, “श्रीमान् जी, इधर देखो। यह सुन्दर ढंग से नियोजित एक शहर का नमूना है। इसमें बहुत से बाग़ हैं। क्या यह चण्डीगढ़ नहीं है ?”

मि० मैथ्यू ने उत्तर दिया, “हाँ, यह चण्डीगढ़ ही है। यह सुंदर शहर शिवालिक पहाड़ियों की तलहटी में स्थित है। इसका नमूना प्रसिद्ध फ्रांसीसी वास्तुकार ली कॉरबुज़िअर ने तैयार किया था। पहाड़ियों के बहुत अधिक निकट होने के कारण चण्डीगढ़ का वातावरण शांत और सुहावना है। चण्डीगढ़ के रोज़ गार्डन्ञ् संसार भर में प्रसिद्ध हैं। इस नगर का औपचारिक रूप से शुभारंभ भारत के तत्कालीन राष्ट्रपति डा. राजेन्द्र प्रसाद ने अक्तूबर 1953 में किया था।”

“Sir, there are …………………….. on their faces.

” विक्की ने कहा, “श्रीमान जी, यहाँ खेलों का सामान बेचने वाली कुछ दुकानें हैं। मैं क्रिकेट का बल्ला और गेंद खरीदना चाहता हूँ।” मि० मैथ्यू ने कहा, “परन्तु खरीदने से पहले, क्या तुम मुझे बता सकते हो कि पंजाब के किस शहर में यह सामान बनाया जाता है ?” विक्की ने उत्तर दिया, “नहीं, श्रीमान् जी।” मि० मैथ्यू ने कहा, “अच्छा, तो सुनो, यह जालंधर है। यह देश में खेलों का सामान बनाने वाले प्रमुख केंद्रों में से एक है। वहां, दूसरी दुकान में ऊनी हौजरी का सामान है। वह लुधियाना से है। हमारे हौजरी उद्योग का 95 प्रतिशत भाग लुधियाना में है। क्या तुम हौजरी का कुछ सामान भी खरीदना पसंद करोगे ?” चिंटू ने कहा, “नहीं, श्रीमान् जी, क्या खरीदा जाये, मैं उसका निर्णय नहीं ले सकता। ऐसी खरीददारी मेरे मातापिता करते हैं।” मि० मैथ्यू ने मिठाई की दुकान की ओर बढ़ते हुए कहा, “अच्छा, बच्चो, शायद तुम अमृतसर की यह जलेबियाँ चखना पसंद करोगे।” सभी बच्चे अपने चेहरों पर मुस्कान बिखेरे उनके पीछे-पीछे चलने लगे।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 5 The Punjab: A Glimpse

Retranslation From English to Hindi

1. This dance is full of energy. — यह नृत्य जोश से भरा हुआ है।
2. The country was partitioned. — देश का बंटवारा कर दिया गया।
3. About 1000 people were killed. — लगभग 1000 लोग मारे गए।
4. Punjab suffered a lot. — पंजाब को बहुत अधिक हानि उठानी पड़ी।
5. You are right. — आपकी बात ठीक है।
6. It is the holiest shrine of the Sikhs. — यह सिखों का सबसे पवित्र धार्मिक स्थल है।
7. This temple is surrounded by water. — यह मंदर जल से घिरा है।
8. It has a number of gardens. — इसमें कई बाग हैं।
9. The temple is double storeyed. — मंदर दो-मंजिला है।
10. They are from Ludhiana. — वे लुधियाना के रहने वाले हैं।
11. It is a small town. — यह एक छोटा सा शहर है।
12. I can hear the melodious strains of Gurbani.– मुझे गुरूवाणी के मधुर स्वर सुनाई दे रहे हैं।

English Guide for Class 8 PSEB Prose

The Earth Needs You Question Answer Class 8 English Solutions Poem Chapter 1 PSEB Solutions

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class English Book Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Class 8th English Solutions Poem Chapter 1 The Earth Needs You Question Answers

The Earth Needs You Class 8 Questions and Answers

Activity – 1

Look up the following words in a dictionary. You should seek the following information about the words and put them- in your WORDS notebook.
1. Meaning of the word as used in the poem (adjective/noun/verb, etc.)
2. Pronunciation (The teacher may refer to the dictionary or a mobile phone for correct pronunciation.)
3. Spellings.

single-use lasts forever
oceans tangles travel

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You

Vocabulary Expansion

Activity 2.

Given below is a table in which you will find one word for a statement or group of words/phrases. We substitute a group of words with only one word and that is why it is called one-word substitution.

S.No. Group of words/phrases Word
1. a disease that affects a large number of people in an area at the same time epidemic
2. a body of persons appointed to hear evidence or judge and give their verdict (decision) jury
3. a game in which no one wins draw
4. a list of books available in a library catalogue
5. a man who does not know how to read or write illiterate
6. an authors handwritten or typed text that has not yet been published manuscript
7. something is written by an unknown person anonymous
8. a person who can speak many languages polyglot
9. a person who does not take alcoholic drinks teetotaller
10. a person interested in reading books and doing nothing else bookworm
11. a person who pays a visit to sacred place pilgrim
12. a woman whose husband is dead widow
13. a thing likely to be broken easily brittle
14. one who practises one of the fine arts artist
15. a person who eats too much glutton
16. a place where clothes are kept wardrobe
17. one who loves or supports one’s country deeply patriot
18. one who is unable to pay one’s debt bankrupt
19. something that can be heard audible
20. the art of beautiful handwriting calligraphy

Activity 3.

Choose any ten words from the table above and write their meaningful sentences in your notebook. Sentences

1. Covid-19 is a dangerous epidemic.
2. The jury has given its decision.
3. The match ended in a draw.
4. I want to borrow a book. Please show me catalogue.
5. He is an illiterate. He can’t even write his name.
6. There are many mistakes in the manuscript.
7. The writer of this story is anonymous.
8. My brother is a polyglot. He can speak five languages.
9. A teetotaller does drink alcohol.
10. His younger brother is a book-worm. He is always reading something.
11. Many pilgrims are going to Haridwar.
12. A widow feels lonely after her husband’s death.
13. Glass is brittle.
14. My brother is a fine artist. He prints beautifully.
15. He eats like a glutton.
16. Please remove your clothes from my wardrobe.
17. Gandhiji was a great patriot.
18. He was declared a bankrupt after he suffered a big loss.
19. Your voice is not audible.
20. He is a master of calligraphy. He write very beautifully.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You

Learning to Read and Comprehend

Activity 4.

Read the poem carefully and answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Who is ‘you’ in the first line?
Answer:
It is the reader.

Question 2.
What does the Earth want from human beings?
पृथ्वी मानव से क्या चाहती है ?
Answer:
The earth wants from human beings to change their ways, and thus, change the face of the earth.

Question 3.
What difference can you and I make to save the Earth?
आप और मैं धरती को बचाने के लिए क्या अंतर ला सकते हैं ?
Answer:
We can check pollution and change ways causing pollution.

Question 4.
What are some single-use plastic things that we buy and use ?
हम ‘single-use plastic’ की कौन – कौन सी चीजें खरीदते हैं और प्रयोग में लाते है
Answer:
Bags boxes, plate, spoons and many other things are made of single-use plastic.

Question 5.
But it’s not very clever’. What according to the poet is not very clever ?
‘But it is not very clever’. कवि के अनुसार क्या clever नहीं है ?
Answer:
Using single-use plastic is not very clever. It may be cheap and may last almost forever.

Question 6.
What happens to the single-use plastic after it is thrown ? When does it end up ?
फेंकने के बाद ‘single – use plastic’ का क्या होता है? यह कहां समाप्त होती है?
Answer:
It flows to oceans, rivers and seas and becomes a part of their water. Sometimes it is caught in trees.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You

Question 7.
What harm does it do to the oceans, rivers and trees ?
यह महासागरों, नदियों तथा वृक्षों को क्या हानि पहुंचाती है ?
Answer:
It poisons their act in the water and hinders the flow of wind.

Question 8.
Does it stay where you throw it? Why?
क्या यह वहीं ठहरी रहती है, जहां इसे फैंका जाता है ? क्यों ?
Answer:
No, it does not. It travels around with the wind.

Question 9.
What does the poet want you to cut down?
कवि हमें किस चीज़ को कम करने के लिए कहता है ?
Answer:
The poet wants us to cut down the use of such things (single-use plastic) as are harmful for our Earth.

Activity 5

Think together and make a list of things that ‘you’ and ‘I can do to make a difference to save the Earth in the space given below. You must write complete sentences.

S.No. Things we must do every day to make a change to save the Earth
1. We must save water. We must not waste it.
2. We must not cut down trees unwisely.
3. We should plant new trees.
4. We should check soil pollution.
5. We should say ‘No’ to poly-bags.
6. We should use paper bags.

Learning Language

Revision of Parts of Speech

Let we revise parts of speech in this chapter. Look at the following table wherein you will find eight parts of speech with their functions and examples. Read and understand them carefully.

Parts of Speech
Parts of Speech Functions Sentences
Nouns name people, place, things, and ideas/concepts Meena loves flowers.
The girl decided to buy a car. I believe in democracy.
Pronouns substitute/replace nouns Why are you pushing me? I gave her a book.
Get me a glass of water.
Adjectives describe nouns and pronouns I saw an excellent film.
The girl in the red frock is happy. I plan to go on a long holiday.
Verbs express a physical action or a state I play basketball.
I am a girl.
Do your homework.
Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives and adverbs She walked slowly.
They are extremely rich. I ran fast.
Prepositions show relationships of words and phrases The book is on the table. The stone sank in the lake. I jumped into the water.
Conjunctions join words, phrases and clauses She is tall and slim.

I will wait untill she arrives. Jim is sick so he can’t come.

Interjections or Exclamations show strong feelings such as surprise or happiness Wow ! that’s beautiful. Ouch ! that hurts.
Oh ! That’s wonderful.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You

Activity 6.

Given below are some words. Categorize them as nouns, pronouns, adjective, verbs, adverbs, preposition, conjunction or exclamations
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You 1
Answer:

Nouns

Pronouns Adjectives Verbs
pen
dog
music
teacher
John
town
London
you
she
your
we
some
I, they
big
red
good
well
interesting
work
have to be
to
like
sing
can
must
Adverbs Preposition Conjections

Interjection/
Exclamation

badly
quckly
silently
very
really
to
at
after
on
before
around
over, of, in, for,
with, from, beneath
throughout
and, but,
although
when
or
however
nevertheless
therefore, yet, so
ouch
hi
oh
wow

Activity 7.

Given below is a chart. Write three sentences for each part of speech in the given space. You must also underline the word that represents its category.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You 2
Answer:
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You 3
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You 4

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You

Learning to Listen (Pairwork)

Activity 8

You will listen to your teacher. She will speak some words. You will write the words in the circles on the side. Spell the words correctly. Once you have written all the words, think about the word that should go in the middle cirele, read the followers. nurse, doctor, operation, medicine, X-ray, rooms, wards hospital Here the word ‘hospital will go in the middle and other words in the side circles because hospitals have nurses, doctors, operations, medicines, X-ray rooms and wards. You may say that ‘hospital is the head word.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You 5
Answer:
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You 6

Learning to Speak (Groupwork)

Activity 9

You are a group of news reporters and you have to speak about people who have lost their homes due to an earthquake in a village where government help has not yet reached.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving 5

Work in groups for five minutes and make notes on what you would want to speak. All members of your group will speak at least one sentence on the topic. You may talk about their problems such as

  • no help has yet. reached from the government.
  • non-availability of hospitals for the injured.
  • no money in their pockets.
  • no place to sleep in winters.
  • nothing much to eat.
  • help available from gurudwaras and temples.
  • some people whose houses were not destroyed by the quake are providing food.

Note :

  • The earthquake has made them homeless.
  • The nights are very cold. People have no place to pass the chilly nights.
  • They have lost almost their everything. They have no food to eat.
  • Their pockets are empty, not a single penny in their pockets.
  • Only some gurudwaras and temples have come to their help. They are running ‘langars for the hungry people.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You

Learning to Write

Letter Writing

Write a letter to your friend informing him about your brother’s marriage and inviting him.
Answer:
F2401 Bollywood
Greens Sector 113
SAS Nagar
May 1, 20 — —
Dear Sunil
I am extremely happy to inform you that my brother is getting married on May 10, 20……… . The functions will start from May 8, 20……… . I am inviting you to all the functions with your parents and sister. You all must come. My father is booking rooms for all the guests. I have asked him to book two rooms for you. I will be there at the station to receive you. I will send you the card soon.
Waiting to see you on May 8, 2020.
Yours sincerely
Sahil

Activity 10.

Write a letter to your friend telling him why it is important to stop using single-use plastic.

B2555 Indian Blues.
Sector 25
Chandigarh
April 13, 2020.
Dear Manmeet
I am going to tell you about a national rather international problem. It is world-wide use of single-use plastic. It is increasing day by day, A large quantity of single-use plastic is thrown out everyday. It chokes our drainage system. As it is not bio-degradable, it keeps lying in heaps here and there. Stray animals eat it up and die. It emits poisonous gases that pollute the air, water and soil. If we have to save our earth, we must stop the use of this plastic without delay. The government should ban its production immediately. I hope you fully agree with me.
Yours sincerely
Gurdeep.

Comprehension Of Stanzas

Read the following stanzas (extracts) and answer the questions given below each :

(1) The Earth needs you
To change your ways,
Month by month
And day by day

The changes are easy
Just look and you’ll see
The differences that can be made
By you and by me.

1. Why does the Earth need us?
धरती को हमारी ज़रूरत क्यों है ?

2. What should we think of ?
हमें क्या बात सोचनी चाहिए?

3. Name the poem and its poet.
कविता और इसके कवि का नाम लिखें।
Answer:
1. The Earth needs us to changes our ways regularly to save our earth.
2. We should think of differences that can be made.
3. The name of the poem is ‘The Earth Needs You’. Its poet is anonymous.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You

(2) Single-use plastic
Lasts almost forever.
It might be cheap
But it’s not very clever.

It can end up in oceans, rivers and seas.
The wind sometimes carries it.
And it tangles in trees.

1. Why do most people use single-use plastic ?
अधिकतर लोग Single -Use plastic का प्रयोग क्यों करते हैं?

2. How is it harmful ? Mention only two points ?
यह किस प्रकार हानिकारक है ? कोई दो बिन्दु लिखिए।

3. Name the poem and its poet.
कविता और इसके कवि का नाम लिखें।
Answer:
1. Most people use single-use plastic because it is cheap and lasts long.
2. It does not break down and stays where it is. It chokes the flow of waters in rivers, seas and oceans.
3. The name of the poem is ‘The Earth Needs You’. It is written by some anonymous poet.

(3) When people drop it on the ground,
This is not where it stays,
It travels around.

If people used less,
The better place the world would be,
The future is in your hands :
Cut down and you’ll see.

1. What is it’ in the first stanza ? How does it spread ?
पहले stanza में it क्या है ? यह कैसी फैलती है ?

2. What can make the world better place ?
संसार को बेहतर स्थान क्या बात बना सकती है ?
3. Give the central idea of that poem.
कविता का मूल भाव लिखिए। .
Answer:
1. It’ in the first stanza is single-use plastic. It spreads as it does not stay at one place. It travels around.
2. Less use of single use plastic can make the world a better place.
3. इसके लिए कृप्या Topic-C Central Idea of the Poem पढ़ें।

Word Meanings

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving 6

The Earth Needs You Poem Summary in English

The Earth Needs You Summary in English

The single-use plastic is a demon. Its increasing use can gulp down our earth any time. It may be cheap. But it does not decay easily. It travels from place to place and flows down to the seas, oceans and rivers. If gets tangled in trees. Thus marine life and the life on earth gets choked. It we want to save our Earth, we must lower the use of single-use plastic, otherwise, we will be heading toward a dark future.

The Earth Needs You Summary in Hindi

Single-use plastic एक राक्षस है। इसका बढ़ता हुआ प्रयोग हमारी धरती को किसी भी समय निगल सकता है। यह सस्ती हो सकती है, परन्तु यह आसानी से समाप्त नहीं होती। यह जगह-जगह जाती रहती है और समुद्रों, महासागरों तथा नदियों में पहुंच जाती है। यह वृक्षों में जाकर फंस जाती है। इस प्रकार जल-जीवन के साथ-साथ पृथ्वी का गला भी घुट जाता है अर्थात् सांस नहीं ले पाता। यदि हमें अपनी पृथ्वी को बचाना है तो हमें Single-use plastic का प्रयोग कम करना होगा। वरना हम अन्धकारमय भविष्य की ओर बढ़ते रहेंगे।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 1 The Earth Needs You

Central idea of the poem

Our Earth is facing the danger of losing life on it. It is due to pollution mainly through the use of single-use plastic. Though cheap, it has choked the flow of life on Earth. The Earth is looking towards us for her survival. The earlier we stop the use of this plastic, the better it will be.

Class 8 PSEB Solutions Poetry

Saint Ravidas Ji Question Answer Class 8 English Solutions Chapter 3 PSEB Solutions

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class English Book Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Class 8th English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji Question Answers

Saint Ravidas Ji Class 8 Questions and Answers

Activity 1:

Look up the following words in a dictionary. You should seek the following information about the words and put them in your WORDS notebook.
1. Meaning of the word as used in the lesson (adjective/noun/verb. etc.)
2. Pronunciation (The teacher may refer to the dictionary or a mobile phone for correct pronunciation.)
3. Spellings.

decay disciple impression sermons meditate
plight essence distinction stress eternal

Prefixes and suffixes

1. The prefixes such as pre-, dis-, un-, im-, in-, mis- generally mean the opposite of
the word they come before
(a) ‘Dishonest is used for a person who is not honest.
(b) ‘Impure’ is used for an object which is not pure.
(c) ‘Impossible’ is used for something that is not possible.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

2. The suffixes -er, -or, -ian and -ist mean a person who performs an action/ does something
(a) ‘Cobbler’ is a person who cobbles (mends shoes).
(b) Historian’ is a person who studies history.

Activity 2

Add the right prefix or suffix to the following words. (You may have to add a vowel or a consonant to complete the spellings.)
1. act —- enact/factor
2. scene —- scenery
3. pot —- potter
4. music —- musical
5. run —- runner
6. sculpt —- sculptor
7. vend —- vendor
8. report —- reporter
9. paint —- painter
10. electric —- electrical
11. happening —- mishappening
12. complete —- compeletion
13. correct —- incorrect
14. patient —- patience
15: possible —- impossibe
16. loyal —- disloyal/loyality
17. read —- reader
18. apper —- appearance
19. appear —- appearance
20. place —- placement

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

Learning to Read and Comprehend

Activity 3.

Write answers to the following questions.

Question 1.
When and where was Ravidas ji born ?
रविदास जी का जन्म कब और कहाँ हुआ ?
Answer:
Ravidas Ji was born in the year 1377 at Banaras.

Question 2.
What did Saint Ravidas ji parents want ?
रविदास जी के माता-पिता क्या चाहते थे ?
Answer:
They wanted him to be educated.

Question 3.
Why could Ravidas ji not continue with his studies ?
रविदास जी अपनी पढ़ाई जारी क्यों नहीं रख सके ?
Answer:
Ravidas ji found an unfriendly atmosphere at school. So he could not put his heart into studies.

Question ‌4.‌
‌What‌ ‌did‌ ‌he‌ ‌understand‌ ‌at‌ ‌ school‌ ‌?‌ ‌
उन्होंने‌ ‌स्कूल‌ ‌में‌ ‌क्या‌ ‌अनुभव‌ ‌किया‌ ‌?‌
‌Answer:
‌He‌ ‌understood‌ ‌at‌ ‌school‌ ‌that‌ ‌a‌ ‌child‌ ‌ born‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌low‌ ‌caste‌ ‌was‌ ‌not‌ ‌treated‌ ‌well‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌society.‌ ‌

Question ‌5.‌ ‌
What‌ ‌was‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌in‌ ‌search‌ ‌of‌ ‌and‌ ‌why?‌ ‌
‌रविदास‌ ‌जी‌ ‌किसकी‌ ‌तलाश‌ ‌में‌ ‌थे‌ ‌और‌ ‌क्यों‌ ‌?‌
‌Answer:
Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌was‌ ‌in‌ ‌search‌ ‌of‌ ‌some‌ ‌ spiritual‌ ‌teacher‌ ‌to‌ ‌show‌ ‌him‌ ‌the‌ ‌right‌ ‌path.‌ ‌

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

Question 6.‌
‌What‌ ‌did‌ ‌Swami‌ ‌Ramanand‌ ‌ji‌ ‌do‌ ‌for‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌?‌ ‌
‌स्वामी‌ ‌रामानन्द.जी‌ ‌ने‌ ‌रविदास‌ ‌जी‌ ‌के‌ ‌लिए‌ ‌क्या‌ ‌किया‌ ‌?‌
‌Answer:
Swami‌ ‌ Ramanand‌ ‌ji‌ ‌kindled‌ ‌spiritual‌ ‌flame‌ ‌in‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌that‌ ‌changed‌ ‌his‌ ‌life.‌ ‌

Question ‌7.‌
‌When‌ ‌did‌ ‌Swami‌ ‌Ramanand‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌back‌ ‌home‌ ‌?‌ ‌
स्वामी‌ ‌रामानन्द‌ ‌जी‌ ‌ने‌ ‌रविदास‌ ‌जी‌ ‌को‌ ‌घर‌ ‌लौट‌ ‌जाने‌ ‌के‌ ‌लिए‌ ‌कब‌ ‌कहा‌ ‌?‌ ‌
Answer:
‌When‌ ‌Swami‌ ‌ Ramanand‌ ‌ji‌ ‌was‌ ‌satisfied‌ ‌that‌ ‌the‌ ‌spiritual‌ ‌flame‌ ‌had‌ ‌been‌ ‌kindled‌ permanently‌ ‌in‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji,‌ ‌he‌ ‌asked,‌ ‌him‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌home.‌ ‌

Question ‌8.‌ ‌
Which‌ ‌place‌ ‌did‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌choose‌ ‌for‌ ‌his‌ ‌meditation‌ ‌?‌ ‌
संत‌ ‌रविदास‌ ‌जी‌ ‌ने‌ ‌ध्यान‌ ‌लगाने‌ ‌के‌ ‌लिए‌ ‌कौन-सा‌ ‌स्थान‌ ‌चुना‌ ‌?‌ ‌
Answer:
‌He‌ ‌choose‌ ‌a‌ ‌peaceful‌ ‌place‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌forest‌ ‌for‌ ‌his‌ ‌meditation.‌ ‌

Question ‌9.
How‌ ‌did‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌save‌ ‌the‌ ‌deer‌ ‌ family‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌?‌ ‌
संत‌ ‌रविदास‌ ‌जी‌ ‌ने‌ ‌शिकारी‌ ‌से‌ ‌मृग‌ ‌परिवार‌ ‌की‌ ‌रक्षा‌ ‌कैसे‌ ‌की‌ ‌?‌ ‌
Answer:
Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌saved‌ ‌the‌ ‌dear‌ ‌family‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌cruel‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌with‌ ‌his‌ ‌words‌ ‌of‌ ‌wisdom‌ ‌and‌ ‌charming‌ ‌personality.‌ ‌

Question 10.‌ ‌
What‌ ‌change‌ ‌was‌ ‌seen‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌after‌ ‌his‌ ‌contact‌ ‌with‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌?‌ ‌
संत‌ ‌रविदास‌ ‌जी‌ ‌के‌ ‌सम्पर्क‌ ‌में‌ ‌आने‌ ‌के‌ ‌बाद‌ ‌शिकारी‌ ‌में‌ ‌क्या‌ ‌परिवर्तन‌ ‌देखने‌ ‌को‌ ‌मिला‌ ‌?‌ ‌
Answer:
All‌ ‌the‌ ‌evil‌ ‌thoughts‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌hunter’s‌ ‌mind‌ ‌were‌ ‌washed‌ ‌away.‌ ‌

Question 11.‌ ‌
What‌ ‌were‌ ‌the‌ ‌main‌ ‌points‌ ‌of‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas’‌ ‌ji‌ ‌teachings‌ ‌?‌ ‌
‌संत‌ ‌रविदास‌ ‌जी‌ ‌की‌ ‌शिक्षा‌ ‌के‌ ‌मुख्य‌ ‌बिंदु‌ ‌क्या‌ ‌थे‌ ‌?‌ ‌
Answer:
The‌ ‌main‌ ‌points‌ ‌of‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji’s‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌were‌ ‌:‌ ‌
(a)‌ ‌all‌ ‌are‌ ‌equal‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌eyes‌ ‌of‌ ‌God.‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌the‌ ‌distinctions‌ ‌of‌ ‌caste,‌ ‌colour‌ ‌and‌ ‌creed‌ ‌are‌ ‌meaningless.‌ ‌
(c)‌ ‌intouchability‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌sin‌ ‌against‌ ‌humanity.‌ ‌

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

Activity‌ ‌4‌

‌What‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌understand‌ ‌about‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌?‌ ‌Write‌ ‌three‌ ‌to‌ ‌four‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌on‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji.‌
‌Answer:
‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌was‌ ‌one‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌great‌ ‌saints‌ ‌of‌ ‌India.‌ ‌He‌ ‌was‌ ‌very‌ ‌humble.‌ ‌He‌ ‌was‌ ‌completely‌ ‌different‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌people‌ ‌of‌ ‌that‌ ‌time.‌ ‌His‌ ‌spiritual‌ ‌message‌ ‌appealed‌ ‌to‌ ‌every‌ ‌body.‌ ‌His‌ ‌charming‌ ‌personality‌ ‌even‌ ‌changed‌ ‌the‌ ‌cruel‌ ‌hunter.‌ ‌‌

Learning‌ ‌Languages‌ ‌
The‌ ‌Verb‌ ‌

Verbs‌ ‌are‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌that‌ ‌show‌ ‌a‌ ‌person’s‌ ‌action‌ ‌or‌ ‌state‌ ‌of‌ ‌Verbs‌
‌वे‌ ‌शब्द‌ ‌होते‌ ‌हैं‌ ‌जो‌ ‌किसी‌ ‌व्यक्ति‌ ‌की‌ ‌क्रिया‌ ‌या‌ ‌उसके‌ ‌कुछ‌ ‌होने‌ ‌की‌ ‌स्थिति‌ ‌को‌ ‌दर्शाते‌ ‌हैं।‌
‌(a)‌ ‌Ashok‌ ‌runs.‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌The‌ ‌dog‌ ‌jumps.‌ ‌
(c)‌ ‌I‌ ‌am‌ ‌eating.‌ ‌
In‌ ‌the‌ ‌examples,‌ ‌fruns’,‌ ‌’jumps’‌ ‌and‌ ‌’am‌ ‌eating‌ ‌are‌ ‌verbs.‌ ‌A‌ ‌verb‌ ‌may‌ ‌further‌ ‌be‌ ‌categorised‌ ‌into‌ ‌the‌ ‌Main‌ ‌verb‌ ‌(मुख्य‌ ‌क्रिया)‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌helping‌ ‌verb‌ ‌(सहायक‌ ‌क्रिया)।‌ ‌

Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Radha‌ ‌is‌ ‌making‌ ‌tea.‌ ‌
2.‌ ‌Malika‌ ‌has‌ ‌made‌ ‌tea.‌ ‌
3.‌ ‌Seema‌ ‌is‌ ‌dancing.‌
‌4.‌ ‌The‌ ‌actors‌ ‌have‌ ‌finished‌ ‌their‌ ‌work.‌ ‌
In‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌above‌ ‌,‌ ‌the‌ ‌verb‌ ‌is‌ ‌in‌ ‌two‌ ‌parts.‌ ‌In‌ ‌sentence‌ ‌1‌ ‌‘is’‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌helping‌ ‌verb‌ ‌and‌ ‌
‘making’‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌main‌ ‌verb.‌ ‌In‌ ‌Sentence‌ ‌2‌ ‌‘has’‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌helping‌ ‌verb‌ ‌and‌ ‌‘made’‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌main‌ ‌
verb.‌ ‌In‌ ‌Sentences‌ ‌3‌ ‌and‌ ‌4‌ ‌’is’‌ ‌and‌ ‌’have’‌ ‌are‌ ‌the‌ ‌helping‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌and‌ ‌dancing’‌ ‌and‌ ‌’finished‌ ‌
are‌ ‌the‌ ‌main‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌respectively.‌ ‌

The‌ ‌main‌ ‌verb‌ ‌expresses‌ ‌the‌ ‌nature‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌action‌ ‌while‌ ‌the‌ ‌helping‌ ‌verb‌ ‌helps‌ ‌the‌ ‌main‌ ‌verb‌ ‌in‌ ‌telling‌ ‌the‌ ‌time‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌action.‌ ‌For‌ ‌example‌ ‌:‌ ‌

नोट‌ ‌:‌ ‌Verb‌ ‌काम‌ ‌की‌ ‌स्थिति‌ ‌बताता‌ ‌है,‌ ‌जबकि‌ ‌Helping‌ ‌Verb‌ ‌काम‌ ‌का‌ ‌समय‌ ‌(Present,‌ ‌Past‌ ‌etc.)‌ ‌निश्चित‌ ‌करता है‌
(a)‌ ‌She‌ ‌is‌ ‌eating.‌ ‌(Action‌ ‌is‌ ‌being‌ ‌done‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌present)‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌She‌ ‌was‌ ‌eating.‌ ‌(Action‌ ‌was‌ ‌being‌ ‌done‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌past)‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌5: ‌

Underline‌ ‌the‌ ‌helping‌ ‌verb‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌single‌ ‌line‌ ‌and‌ ‌encircle‌ ‌the‌ ‌main‌ ‌verb‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌
Example‌ ‌:‌ ‌I‌ ‌am‌ ‌eating‌ ‌an‌ ‌apple.‌ ‌
1.‌ ‌They‌ ‌were‌ ‌eating‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌restaurant.‌
‌2.‌ ‌Rakhee‌ ‌had‌ ‌prepared‌ ‌food‌ ‌at‌ ‌home.‌ ‌
3.‌ ‌The‌ ‌guests‌ ‌were‌ ‌sleeping‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌bedroom.‌ ‌
4.‌ ‌Sushant‌ ‌is‌ ‌sitting‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌kitchen.‌ ‌
5.‌ ‌They‌ ‌have‌ ‌participated‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌race.‌
‌6.‌ ‌Radhika‌ ‌has‌ ‌been‌ ‌playing‌ ‌basketball‌ ‌for‌ ‌several‌ ‌years
7. The‌ ‌will‌ ‌take‌ ‌tea.‌
8.‌ ‌He‌ ‌is‌ ‌practising‌ ‌the‌ ‌piano.‌
‌9.‌ ‌We‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌cinema‌ ‌every‌ ‌week.‌ ‌
10.‌ ‌Navika‌ ‌is‌ ‌reading‌ ‌the‌ ‌newspaper.‌ ‌

Transitive‌ ‌and‌ ‌Intransitive‌ ‌Verbs‌ ‌
Transitive‌ ‌Verb‌ ‌

A‌ ‌transitive‌ ‌verb‌ ‌shows‌ ‌an‌ ‌action‌ ‌that‌ ‌passes‌ ‌over‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌subject‌ ‌to‌ ‌’something‌ ‌or‌ ‌somebody‌ ‌else‌ ‌called‌ ‌the‌ ‌”object”.‌ ‌For‌ ‌example‌ ‌:‌ ‌
(a)‌ ‌The‌ ‌policeman‌ ‌arrested‌ ‌the‌ ‌thief.‌
‌(b)‌ ‌The‌ ‌boys‌ ‌are‌ ‌eating‌ ‌apples.‌ ‌
In‌ ‌sentence‌ ‌a,‌ ‌the‌ ‌action‌ ‌denoted‌ ‌by‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌’arrested‌ ‌passes‌ ‌over‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌subject‌ ‌or‌ ‌doer‌ ‌’policeman’‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌object‌ ‌’thief’.‌ ‌The‌ ‌verb‌ ‌’arrested’‌ ‌is‌ ‌therefore‌ ‌a‌ ‌Transitive‌ ‌Verb.‌ ‌In‌ ‌sentence‌ ‌’b’‌ ‌the‌ ‌verb‌ ‌’eating’‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌transitive‌ ‌verb.‌

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

Intransitive‌ ‌Verb‌ : ‌An‌ ‌Intransitive‌ ‌Verbʻis‌ ‌a‌ ‌word‌ ‌that‌ ‌denotes‌ ‌a‌ ‌state‌ ‌or‌ ‌an‌ ‌action‌ ‌that‌ ‌is‌ ‌complete‌ ‌in‌ ‌itself.‌ ‌It‌ ‌does‌ ‌not‌ ‌pass‌ ‌over‌ ‌to‌ ‌an‌ ‌object.‌ ‌For‌ ‌example‌ ‌:‌ ‌
(a)‌ ‌The‌ ‌bangles‌ ‌are‌ ‌green.‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌Seema‌ ‌seems‌ ‌sad.‌ ‌
(c)‌ ‌Water‌ ‌boils‌ ‌at‌ ‌100‌ ‌degree‌ ‌centigrade.‌
‌(d)‌ ‌The‌ ‌child‌ ‌was‌ ‌crying.‌
‌(e)‌ ‌She‌ ‌travelled‌ ‌yesterday.‌ ‌

In‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌above,‌ ‌the‌ ‌action‌ ‌is‌ ‌done‌ ‌by‌ ‌the‌ ‌subject‌ ‌and‌ ‌does‌ ‌not‌ ‌pass‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌object.‌ ‌The‌ ‌action‌ ‌stops‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌doer.‌ ‌The‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌are’,‌ ‌’seems’,‌ ‌’boils’,‌ ‌’was’‌ ‌and‌ ‌’travelled‌ ‌are‌ ‌therefore‌ ‌Intransitive‌ ‌verbs.‌ ‌
Some‌ ‌transitive‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌such‌ ‌as‌ ‌‘ask”,‌ ‌offer’,‌ ‌promise’,‌ ‌’tell‌ ‌etc.‌ ‌take‌ ‌two‌ ‌objects‌ ‌-‌ ‌Direct‌ ‌object‌ ‌and‌ ‌Indirect‌ ‌object.‌ ‌

नोट‌ ‌:‌ ‌Transitive‌ ‌Verb‌ ‌को‌ ‌Object‌ ‌की‌ ‌ज़रूरत‌ ‌होती‌ ‌है‌ ‌परन्तु‌ ‌Intransitive‌ ‌Verb‌ ‌को‌ ‌Object‌ ‌की‌ ‌ज़रूरत‌ ‌नहीं‌ ‌होती।‌ ‌वह‌ ‌अपने‌ ‌आप‌ ‌में‌ ‌पूर्ण‌ ‌होता‌ ‌है।‌ ‌
An‌ ‌Indirect‌ ‌Object‌ ‌denotes‌ ‌the‌ ‌person‌ ‌to‌ ‌whom‌ ‌something‌ ‌is‌ ‌given‌ ‌or‌ ‌for‌ ‌whom‌ ‌something‌ ‌is‌ ‌done.‌ ‌

A‌ ‌Direct‌ ‌Object‌ ‌is‌ ‌usually‌ ‌the‌ ‌name‌ ‌(a‌ ‌Proper‌ ‌noun‌ ‌or‌ ‌a‌ ‌Pronoun)‌ ‌of‌ ‌something.‌ ‌Usually,‌ ‌the‌ ‌indirect‌ ‌object‌ ‌comes‌ ‌before‌ ‌the‌ ‌direct‌ ‌object‌ ‌as‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌examples‌ ‌given‌ ‌below.‌ ‌

S. No. Subject + Verb Indirect Object Direct Object
1 He gave me an apple
2 The teacher told us a story
3 Will you make me a cup of tea ?
4 He offered me a job

These‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌can‌ ‌be‌ ‌written‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌different‌ ‌way‌ ‌also.‌ ‌The‌ ‌direct‌ ‌object‌ ‌comes‌ ‌before‌ ‌the‌ ‌indirect‌ ‌object‌ ‌but‌ ‌it‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌followed‌ ‌by‌ ‌a‌ ‌preposition.‌ ‌

S. No. Subject + Verb Direct Object Preposition Indirect Object
1 He gave an apple to me.
2 The teacher told a story to us.
3 Will you make a cup of tea for me ?
4 He offered a job to me.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

Some‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌can‌ ‌be‌ ‌both‌ ‌transitive‌ ‌or‌ ‌intransitive‌ ‌without‌ ‌change‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌form‌ ‌but‌ ‌with‌ ‌change‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌verb‌

S. No. Transitive Intransitive
1 The horse drew the cart. They drew near us.
2 The driver stopped the train. The train stopped suddenly.
3 The peon range the bell. The bell rang.

An‌ ‌intransitive‌ ‌verb‌ ‌may‌ ‌become‌ ‌transitive‌ ‌when‌ ‌combined‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌preposition;‌ ‌as.‌

S. No. Transitive Intransitive
1 He burnt his hands. He burnt with rage.
2 He eats bread. We eat to live.
3 They opened the door. The story opens with a comedy

Activity‌ ‌6‌

‌State‌ ‌whether‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌are‌ ‌Transitive‌ ‌or‌ ‌Intransitive.‌ ‌Also‌ ‌I‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌verb‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌object‌ ‌(if‌ ‌any)‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌space‌ ‌given.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌She‌ ‌has‌ ‌lost‌ ‌her‌ ‌bag.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌lost;‌ ‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌her‌ ‌bag)‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌The‌ ‌wind‌ ‌is‌ ‌blowing‌ ‌strongly.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb‌ ‌:‌ ‌blowing‌ ‌;‌ ‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌…………)

3.‌ ‌Babli‌ ‌closed‌ ‌the‌ ‌window.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌closed‌ ‌;‌ ‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌window)‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Soon‌ ‌…….. the‌ ‌door‌ ‌opened.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌opened‌ ‌; Object‌ ‌:‌ ……..)

‌5.‌ ‌He‌ ‌pulled‌ ‌open‌ ‌the‌ ‌……. door.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌pulled‌ ‌open‌ ;‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌the‌ ‌door)‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌His‌ ‌novel‌ ‌is‌ ‌………… selling‌ ‌well.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌selling‌ ; ‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌his‌ ‌novel)‌ ‌

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

‌7.‌ ‌The‌ ‌teacher‌ ‌went‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌school.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb‌ ‌:‌ ‌went‌ ‌; Object‌:…..)

‌8.‌ ‌He‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌his‌ ‌table.‌……… ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌like‌ ;‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌table)‌ ‌

9.‌ ‌Tim‌ ‌likes‌ ‌climbing‌ ‌……..mountains.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌likes‌ ‌;Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌climbing‌ ‌mountains)‌ ‌

10.‌ ‌Manju‌ ‌is‌ ‌………going‌ ‌to‌ ‌buy‌ ‌him‌ ‌a‌ ‌book.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌going‌ ‌;Object‌ ‌:……)‌ ‌

11.‌ ‌She‌ ‌has‌ ‌invited‌ ‌her‌ ‌friends.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌invited‌ ; ‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌her‌ ‌friends).‌ ‌

12.‌ ‌She‌ ‌didn’t‌ ‌sleep‌ ‌very‌ ‌…….. well.‌ ‌
‌(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb‌ ‌:‌ ‌didn’t‌ ‌sleep‌‌; ‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌…….)

13.‌ ‌She‌ ‌sat‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌park.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌sat‌ ‌ ,Object‌ ‌:‌ ……)

‌14.‌ ‌They‌ ‌have‌ ‌won.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌won‌ ‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ……)‌

15.‌ ‌Their‌ ‌team‌ ‌won‌ ‌the‌ ‌match.‌ ‌..‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌won‌ ‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌the‌ ‌match)‌

‌16.‌ ‌The‌ ‌car‌ ‌needs‌ ‌a‌ ‌new‌ ‌battery.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb‌ ‌:‌ ‌needs‌ ‌.‌ ‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌a‌ ‌new‌ ‌battery)‌

‌17.‌ ‌We‌ ‌must‌ ‌see‌ ‌them‌ ‌this‌ ‌weekend.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌see‌ ;‌Object‌ ‌: ‌them)‌ ‌

18.‌ ‌They‌ ‌should‌ ‌no‌ ‌longer‌ ‌wait.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb‌ ‌:‌ wait ‌; Object‌ ‌‌:‌ ‌…………)‌ ‌

19.‌ ‌Harpreet‌ ‌was‌ ‌upset.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive‌ ‌;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌was‌ ‌;‌ ‌Object‌ ‌‌:‌ ‌…………)

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

‌20.‌ ‌It‌ ‌is‌ ‌snowing.‌ ‌
(Transitive/Intransitive;‌ ‌Verb:‌ ‌snowing;‌ ‌Object‌ ‌:‌ ‌…………)

Learning‌ ‌to‌ ‌Speak‌ ‌(Groupwork‌ ‌(Group‌ ‌of‌ ‌6)‌ ‌

Activity‌ 7:

Each‌ ‌student‌ ‌in‌ ‌all‌ ‌the‌ ‌groups‌ ‌will‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌secret‌ ‌thing‌ ‌about‌ ‌himself/herself.‌ ‌The‌ ‌other‌ ‌group‌ ‌members‌ ‌will‌ ‌guess‌ ‌the‌ ‌secret‌ ‌in‌ ‌5‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌The‌ ‌answers‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌in‌ ‌full‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

Questions‌ ‌you‌ ‌may‌ ‌ask‌ ‌:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌What‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌secret‌ ‌about‌ ‌-you,‌ ‌your‌ ‌friends‌ ‌or‌ ‌your‌ ‌family‌ ‌?‌ ‌
(The‌ ‌secret‌ ‌is‌ ‌about‌ ‌me/my‌ ‌friend/my‌ ‌family.)‌ ‌
2.‌ ‌Is‌ ‌it‌ ‌about‌ ‌something‌ ‌you‌ ‌do,‌ ‌or‌ ‌something‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌or‌ ‌something‌ ‌you‌ ‌have‌ ‌or‌ ‌something‌ ‌you‌ ‌eat‌ ‌?‌ ‌
3.‌ ‌Is‌ ‌it‌ ‌about‌ ‌what‌ ‌you‌ ‌play/make/speak/read‌ ‌or‌ ‌have‌ ‌?‌ ‌
4.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌play‌ ‌cricket/football/kabaddi/fly‌ ‌kite‌ ‌?‌ ‌
5.‌ ‌Well,‌ ‌what‌ ‌is‌ ‌your‌ ‌secret‌ ‌?‌ ‌
Answer:‌
‌1.‌ ‌The‌ ‌secret‌ ‌is‌ ‌about‌ ‌me.‌
‌2.‌ ‌It‌ ‌is‌ ‌about‌ ‌something‌ ‌I‌ ‌like.‌
‌3.‌ ‌It‌ ‌is‌ ‌about‌ ‌what‌ ‌I‌ ‌play.‌
‌4.‌ ‌I‌ ‌play‌ ‌cricket.‌ ‌
5.‌ ‌The‌ ‌secret‌ ‌is‌ ‌that‌ ‌I‌ ‌am‌ ‌weak‌ ‌against‌ ‌spin.‌ ‌

Learning‌ ‌to‌ ‌Write‌ ‌
Dialogue‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌

As‌ ‌you‌ ‌know‌ ‌that‌ ‌writing‌ ‌a‌ ‌dialogue‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌very‌ ‌enriching‌ ‌activity.‌ ‌For‌ ‌converting‌ ‌a‌ ‌passage‌ ‌or‌ ‌a‌ ‌story‌ ‌into‌ ‌a‌ ‌dialogue,‌ ‌you‌ ‌need‌ ‌to‌ ‌follow‌ ‌a‌ ‌few‌ ‌steps‌ ‌:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌the‌ ‌name‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌characters‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌followed‌ ‌by‌ ‌a‌ ‌colon‌ ‌(:) s‌ ‌
2.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌not‌ ‌use‌ ‌words‌ ‌such‌ ‌as‌ ‌’said,‌ ‌’asked,‌ ‌“replied,‌ ‌’told’,‌ ‌etc.‌ ‌
3.‌ ‌After‌ ‌the‌ ‌colon,‌ ‌write‌ ‌what‌ ‌the‌ ‌person‌ ‌has‌ ‌said‌ ‌without‌ ‌changing‌ ‌the‌ ‌words.‌ ‌Simply‌ ‌write‌ ‌it.‌ ‌
4.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌not‌ ‌use‌ ‌inverted‌ ‌commas‌ ‌(“‌ ‌”)‌ ‌for‌ ‌what‌ ‌the‌ ‌speaker‌ ‌has‌ ‌to‌ ‌say.‌
‌5.‌ ‌If‌ ‌the‌ ‌character‌ ‌is‌ ‌doing‌ ‌some‌ ‌action;‌ ‌write‌ ‌that‌ ‌after‌ ‌the‌ ‌name‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌character‌ ‌but‌ ‌before‌ ‌the‌ ‌colon‌ ‌in‌ ‌brackets.‌ ‌
For‌ ‌example‌ ‌:‌ ‌Ram‌ ‌(wiping‌ ‌his‌ ‌forehead):‌ ‌Where‌ ‌is‌ ‌my‌ ‌geometry‌ ‌box‌ ‌?‌
‌Amar‌ :‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌you‌ ‌have‌ ‌kept‌ ‌it‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌desk.‌ ‌

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

Activity‌ ‌8‌

‌Write‌ ‌the‌ ‌dialogue‌ ‌between‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌hunter.‌

‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌:‌ ‌Why‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌kill‌ ‌poor‌ ‌animals‌ ‌?‌ ‌You‌ ‌must‌ ‌take‌ ‌pity‌ ‌on‌ ‌them.‌
Hunter‌ ‌:‌ ‌I‌ ‌eat‌ ‌their‌ ‌flesh.‌ ‌It‌ ‌is‌ ‌my‌ ‌food.‌ ‌Hunting‌ ‌gives‌ ‌me‌ ‌food‌ ‌for‌ ‌my‌ ‌family‌ ‌too.‌
‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌:‌ ‌But‌ ‌it‌ ‌cruel‌ ‌to‌ ‌of‌ ‌you‌ ‌take‌ ‌away‌ ‌young‌ ‌ones‌ ‌from‌ ‌their‌ ‌mother.‌ ‌
Hunter‌ ‌‌:‌ ‌Your‌ ‌saved‌ ‌words‌ ‌have‌ ‌changed‌ ‌my‌ ‌heart.‌ ‌Now‌ ‌I‌ ‌am‌ ‌no‌ ‌more‌ ‌a‌ ‌killer.‌ ‌I‌ ‌love‌ ‌all‌ ‌the‌ ‌creatures‌ ‌of‌ ‌God.‌

‌Learning‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌the‌ ‌language‌ ‌[Groupwork‌ ‌(Group‌ ‌of‌ ‌4-5)]‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌9

‌A‌ ‌father‌ ‌is‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌his‌ ‌son‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌tea.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌a‌ ‌dialogue‌ ‌between‌ ‌the‌ ‌father‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌son.‌ ‌
Father‌ ‌:‌ ‌I‌ ‌am‌ ‌badly‌ ‌tired‌ ‌today.‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌a‌ ‌cup‌ ‌of‌ ‌hot‌ ‌tea‌ ‌for‌ ‌me.‌ ‌
Son‌ ‌:‌ ‌But‌ ‌I‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌tea.‌
Father:‌ ‌Not‌ ‌very‌ ‌difficult.‌ ‌Just‌ ‌follow‌ ‌the‌ ‌steps,‌ ‌I‌ ‌dictate‌ ‌you.‌ ‌
Son‌ ‌:‌ ‌Please‌ ‌start.‌ ‌I‌ ‌am‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌kitchen.‌
‌Father‌ ‌:‌ ‌Boil‌ ‌some‌ ‌water‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌kettle.‌ ‌Put‌ ‌some‌ ‌tea‌ ‌leaves‌ ‌in‌ ‌it.‌ ‌When‌ ‌they‌ ‌start‌ ‌giving‌ ‌colour,‌ ‌remove‌ ‌the‌ ‌cattle‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌gas‌ ‌burner.‌ ‌The‌ ‌tea‌ ‌is‌ ‌ready.‌ ‌I‌ ‌will‌ ‌add‌ ‌sugar‌ ‌and‌ ‌milk‌ ‌to‌ ‌it‌ ‌according‌ ‌to‌ ‌my‌ ‌taste.‌ ‌

Comprehension‌ ‌Of‌ ‌Passages‌ ‌

‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌passage‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌given‌ ‌below‌ ‌each‌ ‌:‌ ‌

(1)‌ ‌India‌ ‌has‌ ‌been‌ ‌a‌ ‌home‌ ‌for‌ ‌saints‌ ‌and‌ ‌sages.‌ ‌Whenever‌ ‌the‌ ‌moral‌ ‌or‌ ‌social‌ ‌life‌ ‌of‌ ‌people‌ ‌shows‌ ‌signs‌ ‌of‌ ‌decay,‌ ‌some‌ ‌saint‌ ‌or‌ ‌prophet‌ ‌appears‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌scene.‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌was‌ ‌one‌ ‌such‌ ‌saint‌ ‌who‌ ‌infused‌ ‌new‌ ‌life‌ ‌and‌ ‌vitality‌ ‌into‌ ‌the‌ ‌Hindu‌ ‌social‌ ‌order.‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌was‌ ‌born‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌year‌ ‌1377‌ ‌in‌ ‌Banaras,‌ ‌the‌ ‌holy‌ ‌city‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Hindus.‌ ‌He‌ ‌was‌ ‌the‌ ‌son‌ ‌of‌ ‌a‌ ‌cobbler.‌ ‌His‌ ‌parents‌ ‌wanted‌ ‌him‌ ‌to‌ ‌be‌ ‌educated.‌ ‌They‌ ‌sent‌ ‌him‌ ‌to‌ ‌school.‌ ‌Unluckily,‌ ‌he‌ ‌was‌ ‌unhappy‌ ‌at‌ ‌school‌ ‌and‌ ‌very‌ ‌soon‌ ‌he‌ ‌was‌ ‌out‌ ‌of‌ ‌it.‌ ‌The‌ ‌school‌ ‌life‌ ‌made‌ ‌him‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌ills‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌society.‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌realized‌ ‌that‌ ‌a‌ ‌child‌ ‌born‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌low‌ ‌caste‌ ‌was‌ ‌not‌ ‌treated‌ ‌well‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌society.‌ ‌In‌ ‌such‌ ‌an‌ ‌unfriendly‌ ‌atmosphere,‌ ‌little‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌could‌ ‌not‌ ‌put‌ ‌his‌ ‌heart‌ ‌into‌ ‌studies.‌ ‌Often‌ ‌he‌ ‌would‌ ‌sit‌ ‌alone‌ ‌and‌ ‌think‌ ‌deeply.‌ ‌It‌ ‌would‌ ‌then‌ ‌appear‌ ‌as‌ ‌if‌ ‌he‌ ‌were‌ ‌in‌ ‌deep‌ ‌Samadhi.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌When‌ ‌and‌ ‌where‌ ‌was‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌born‌ ‌?‌ ‌
संत‌ ‌रविदास‌ ‌जी‌ ‌का‌ ‌जन्म‌ ‌कब‌ ‌और‌ ‌कहां‌ ‌हुआ‌ ‌था‌ ‌?‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌What‌ ‌did‌ ‌his‌ ‌parents‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌have‌ ‌him‌ ‌?‌ ‌
उनके‌ ‌माता-पिता‌ ‌उनसे‌ ‌क्या‌ ‌चाहते‌ ‌थे‌ ‌?‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌true‌ ‌and‌ ‌false‌ ‌statements‌ ‌
and‌ ‌write‌ ‌them‌ ‌in‌ ‌your‌ ‌answer-book‌ ‌:‌ ‌
(a)‌ ‌Banaras‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌holy‌ ‌city‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Hindus.‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌took‌ ‌great‌ ‌interest‌ ‌in‌ ‌his‌ ‌studies.‌

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

‌4.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌according‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌:‌ ‌
(a)‌ ‌Often‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌would‌ ‌sit‌ ‌alone‌ ‌……….‌
‌(b)‌ ‌It‌ ‌left‌ ‌a‌ ‌deep‌ ‌……………‌ ‌
Or‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌with‌ ‌their‌ ‌meanings‌ ‌:‌

 (i)‌ ‌Purpose‌ common‌
‌(ii)‌ ‌ordinary‌ ‌ goal‌
unhappy‌

Answer: ‌
1.‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌was‌ ‌born‌ ‌at‌ ‌Banaras‌ ‌in‌ ‌1377‌ ‌A.D.‌
‌2.‌ ‌His‌ ‌parents‌ ‌wanted‌ ‌to‌ ‌have‌ ‌him‌ ‌educated.‌ ‌
3.‌
‌(a)‌ ‌True
(b)‌ ‌False.‌
‌4.‌ ‌(a) ‌Often‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌would‌ ‌sit‌ ‌alone‌ ‌and‌ ‌think‌ ‌deeply.‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌It‌ ‌left‌ ‌a‌ ‌deep‌ ‌and‌ ‌lasting‌ ‌scar‌ ‌on‌ ‌his‌ ‌mind.‌ ‌
Or‌ ‌
(i)‌ ‌purpose‌ ‌-‌ ‌goal‌ ‌
(ii)‌ ‌ordinary – ‌ ‌common.‌ ‌

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

(2)‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌got‌ ‌up‌ ‌and‌ ‌looked‌ ‌around.‌ ‌A‌ ‌she‌ ‌deer‌ ‌had‌ ‌been‌ ‌caught‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌net‌ ‌laid‌ ‌by‌ ‌a‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌The‌ ‌poor‌ ‌animal‌ ‌was‌ ‌struggling‌ ‌to‌ ‌get‌ ‌tree.‌ ‌As‌ ‌the‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌approached‌ ‌her,‌ ‌she‌ ‌looked‌ ‌at‌ ‌him‌ ‌with‌ ‌pleading‌ ‌eyes.‌ ‌It‌ ‌was‌ ‌as‌ ‌if‌ ‌she‌ ‌was‌ ‌begging‌ ‌for‌ ‌mercy.‌ ‌It‌ ‌was‌ ‌her‌ ‌time‌ ‌to‌ ‌feed‌ ‌her‌ ‌young‌ ‌ones.‌ ‌The‌ ‌three‌ ‌fawns‌ ‌came‌ ‌jumping‌ ‌to‌ ‌her‌ ‌joyfully‌ ‌but‌ ‌they‌ ‌were‌ ‌shocked‌ ‌when‌ ‌they‌ ‌saw‌ ‌their‌ ‌mother‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌miserable‌ ‌plight.‌ ‌The‌ ‌mother‌ ‌and‌ ‌her‌ ‌young‌ ‌ones‌ ‌were‌ ‌a‌ ‌painful‌ ‌picture‌ ‌of‌ ‌misery‌ ‌and‌ ‌helplessness.‌ ‌Their‌ ‌silent‌ ‌prayers‌ ‌and‌ ‌their‌ ‌sad‌ ‌eyes‌ ‌could‌ ‌have‌ ‌melted‌ ‌even‌ ‌a‌ ‌heart‌ ‌of‌ ‌stone.‌ ‌But‌ ‌the‌ ‌cruel‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌remained‌ ‌unmoved.‌ ‌His‌ ‌eyes‌ ‌showed‌ ‌no‌ ‌truce‌ ‌of‌ ‌pity‌ ‌or‌ ‌kindness.‌ ‌He‌ ‌stepped‌ ‌forward‌ ‌to‌ ‌capture‌ ‌the‌ ‌animal‌ ‌and‌ ‌her‌ ‌young‌ ‌ones.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Who‌ ‌was‌ ‌begging‌ ‌for‌ ‌mercy‌ ‌and‌ ‌why?‌ ‌
दया‌ ‌की‌ ‌याचना‌ ‌कौन‌ ‌कर‌ ‌रहा‌ ‌था‌ ‌और‌ ‌क्यों‌ ‌?‌

‌2.‌ ‌When‌ ‌were‌ ‌the‌ ‌three‌ ‌fawns‌ ‌shocked‌ ‌?‌ ‌
तीन शावकों को दुःख कब पहुंचा

3.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌true‌ ‌and‌ ‌false‌ ‌statements‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌them‌ ‌in‌ ‌your‌ ‌answer-book‌ ‌:‌ ‌
(a)‌ ‌The‌ ‌hunter’s‌ ‌eyes‌ ‌showed‌ ‌no‌ ‌trace‌ ‌pity.‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌The‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌did‌ ‌not‌ ‌try‌ ‌to‌ ‌capture‌ ‌the‌ ‌mother‌ ‌deer‌ ‌and‌ ‌her‌ ‌young‌ ‌ones.‌

‌4.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌according‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ :
‌(a)‌ ‌The‌ ‌mother‌ ‌and‌ ‌her‌ ‌young‌ ‌ones‌ ‌were‌ ‌a‌ ‌painful‌ ‌picture‌ ‌of‌ ‌…………….‌
‌(b)‌ ‌Their‌ ‌sad‌ ‌eyes‌ ‌could‌ ‌have‌ ‌melted‌ ‌even‌ ‌…..‌ ‌
Or‌
‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌with‌ ‌their‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌:‌ ‌

(i)‌ ‌Capture‌ difficult‌
‌(ii)‌ ‌plight‌ catch
sign

Answer:
1.‌ ‌A‌ ‌she-deer‌ ‌was‌ ‌begging‌ ‌for‌ ‌mercy‌ ‌because‌ ‌she‌ ‌was‌ ‌caught‌ ‌in‌ ‌hunter’s‌ ‌net.‌ ‌
2.‌ ‌The‌ ‌three‌ ‌fawns‌ ‌were‌ ‌shocked‌ ‌when‌ ‌they‌ ‌saw‌ ‌their‌ ‌mother‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌difficult‌ ‌plight.‌ ‌
3.‌ ‌(a)‌ ‌True
(b)‌ ‌False.‌ ‌
4.‌ ‌(a)‌ ‌The‌ ‌mother‌ ‌and‌ ‌her‌ ‌young‌ ‌ones‌ ‌were‌ ‌a‌ ‌painful‌ ‌picture‌ ‌of‌ ‌misery‌ ‌and‌ ‌helplessness.‌
(b)‌ ‌Their‌ ‌sad‌ ‌eyes‌ ‌could‌ ‌have‌ ‌melted‌ ‌even‌ ‌a‌ ‌heart‌ ‌of‌ ‌stone.‌ ‌
Or‌
‌(i)‌ ‌Capture‌ ‌—‌ ‌catch‌ ‌
(ii)‌ ‌plight—‌ ‌difficult‌ ‌situation.‌ ‌

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

(3)‌ ‌The‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌listened‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌kind‌ ‌words‌ ‌of‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌ji‌ ‌and‌ ‌felt‌ ‌deep‌ ‌respect‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌Saint.‌ ‌The‌ ‌charm‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Saint’s‌ ‌personality‌ ‌and‌ ‌his‌ ‌words‌ ‌of‌ ‌wisdom‌ ‌washed‌ ‌away‌ ‌all‌ ‌evil‌ ‌thoughts‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌hunter’s‌ ‌mind.‌ ‌It‌ ‌was‌ ‌a‌ ‌miracle‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌hunter.‌ ‌A‌ ‌short‌ ‌meeting‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌great‌ ‌saint‌ ‌had‌ ‌changed‌ ‌him‌ ‌completely.‌ ‌A‌ ‌killer’s‌ ‌heart‌ ‌was‌ ‌filled‌ ‌with‌ ‌love‌ ‌for‌ ‌God‌ ‌and‌ ‌all‌ ‌His‌ ‌creation.‌ ‌The‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌promised‌ ‌to‌ ‌lead‌ ‌a‌ ‌compassionate‌ ‌life‌ ‌and‌ ‌never‌ ‌to‌ ‌cause‌ ‌harm‌ ‌to‌ ‌anyone.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌What‌ ‌washed‌ ‌away‌ ‌all‌ ‌evil‌ ‌thoughts‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌hunter’s‌ ‌mind‌ ‌?‌ ‌
शिकारी‌ ‌के‌ ‌मन‌ ‌से‌ ‌संभी‌ ‌बुरे‌ ‌विचार‌ ‌किस‌ ‌चीज़‌ ‌ने‌ ‌दूर‌ ‌किये‌ ‌?‌

‌2.‌ ‌What‌ ‌contact‌ ‌changed‌ ‌the‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌completely‌ ‌?‌ ‌
किस‌ ‌सम्पर्क‌ ‌ने‌ ‌शिकारी‌ ‌को‌ ‌पूरी‌ ‌तरह‌ ‌बदल‌ ‌दिया‌ ‌?‌

‌3.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌true‌ ‌and‌ ‌false‌ ‌statements‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌them‌ ‌in‌ ‌your‌ ‌answer-book‌ ‌:‌ ‌
(a)‌ ‌The‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌listened‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌sweet‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌deep‌ ‌respect.‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌The‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌felt‌ ‌as‌ ‌if‌ ‌a‌ ‌miracle‌ ‌had‌ ‌happened.‌

‌4.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌according‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌

(a)‌ ‌The‌ ‌killer‌ ‌was‌ ‌filled‌ ‌with‌ ‌love‌ ‌of‌ ‌God‌ ‌and‌ ‌………..‌
‌(b)‌ ‌The‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌promised‌ ‌to‌ ‌…..‌ ‌
Write‌ ‌the‌ ‌meanings‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌English‌ ‌:‌ ‌(Any‌ ‌two)‌
‌(i)‌ ‌momentary‌ ‌
(ii)‌ ‌charm‌ ‌
‌(iii)‌ ‌virtuous.‌ ‌
Answer:
1.‌ ‌The‌ ‌charm‌ ‌of‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji’s‌ ‌spiritual‌ ‌personality‌ ‌and‌ ‌his‌ ‌words‌ ‌of‌ ‌deep‌ ‌wisdom‌ ‌washed‌ ‌away‌ ‌all‌ ‌evil‌ ‌thoughts‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌hunter’s‌ ‌mind.‌
2.‌ ‌A‌ ‌momentary‌ ‌contact‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌great‌ ‌saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌changed‌ ‌the‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌completely.‌
3.‌ ‌(a)‌ ‌True‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌True.‌ ‌
4.‌ ‌(a)‌ ‌The‌ ‌killer‌ ‌was‌ ‌filled‌ ‌with‌ ‌love‌ ‌of‌ ‌God‌ ‌and‌ ‌all‌ ‌His‌ ‌creation.‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌The‌ ‌hunter‌ ‌promised‌ ‌to‌ ‌lead‌ ‌a‌ ‌Compassionate‌ ‌life.‌ ‌
Or‌ ‌
(i)‌ ‌of‌ ‌a‌ ‌very‌ ‌small‌ ‌time‌ ‌
(ii)‌ ‌attraction/spell‌ ‌
(iii)‌ ‌pure/morally‌ ‌good.‌

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

(4)‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌was‌ ‌always‌ ‌very‌ ‌humble.‌ ‌He‌ ‌was‌ ‌different‌ ‌from‌ ‌most‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌scholars‌ ‌and‌ ‌religious‌ ‌men‌ ‌of‌ ‌his‌ ‌time.‌ ‌He‌ ‌never‌ ‌boasted‌ ‌of‌ ‌his‌ ‌knowledge‌ ‌and‌ ‌wisdom.‌ ‌His‌ ‌divine‌ ‌knowledge‌ ‌came‌ ‌direct‌ ‌from‌ ‌within.‌ ‌He‌ ‌had‌ ‌a‌ ‌charming‌ ‌personality.‌ ‌His‌ ‌spiritual‌ ‌message‌ ‌appealed‌ ‌to‌ ‌every‌ ‌heart.‌ ‌People‌ ‌listened‌ ‌to‌ ‌him‌ ‌spellbound.‌ ‌He‌ ‌spoke‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌clear‌ ‌manner.‌ ‌He‌ ‌told‌ ‌people‌ ‌that‌ ‌all‌ ‌are‌ ‌equal‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌eyes‌ ‌of‌ ‌God.‌ ‌

The‌ ‌distinctions‌ ‌of‌ ‌caste,‌ ‌colour‌ ‌and‌ ‌creed‌ ‌are‌ ‌meaningless.‌ ‌They‌ ‌are‌ ‌all‌ ‌man-made.‌ ‌Saint‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌brought‌ ‌great‌ ‌hope‌ ‌for‌ ‌those‌ ‌who‌ ‌were‌ ‌poor,‌ ‌weak‌ ‌and‌ ‌backward.‌ ‌He‌ ‌filled‌ ‌them‌ ‌with‌ ‌hope,‌ ‌courage‌ ‌and‌ ‌confidence.‌ ‌He‌ ‌inspired‌ ‌them‌ ‌not‌ ‌to‌ ‌bow‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌unjust‌ ‌demands‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌high-caste‌ ‌people.‌ ‌He‌ ‌inspirerd‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌recognize‌ ‌the‌ ‌strength‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌spirit‌ ‌within‌ ‌them.‌ ‌He‌ ‌asked‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌stay‌ ‌away‌ ‌from‌ ‌all‌ ‌weak‌ ‌thoughts.‌ ‌He‌ ‌always‌ ‌said,‌ ‌“Untouchability‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌sin‌ ‌against‌ ‌humanity.”‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Why‌ ‌did‌ ‌people‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌spellbound‌ ‌?‌
लोग‌ ‌रविदास‌ ‌जी‌ ‌के‌ ‌वचनों‌ ‌को‌ ‌मन्त्र-मुग्ध‌ ‌होकर‌ ‌क्यों‌ ‌सुनते‌ ‌थे‌ ‌?‌ ‌
2.‌ ‌How‌ ‌did‌ ‌he‌ ‌oppose‌ ‌the‌ ‌distinctions‌ ‌of‌ ‌caste‌ ‌or‌ ‌colour‌ ?‌ ‌
उन्होंने‌ ‌जाति‌ ‌अथवा‌ ‌रंग‌ ‌के‌ ‌भेदभाव‌ ‌का‌ ‌कैसे‌ ‌विरोध‌ ‌किया‌ ‌?‌ ‌
3.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌true‌ ‌and‌ ‌false‌ ‌statements‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌them‌ ‌in‌ ‌your‌ ‌answer-book‌ ‌:‌ ‌
(a)‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌spoke‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌clear‌ ‌manner.‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌He‌ ‌inspired‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌bow‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌unjust‌ ‌demands‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌high‌ ‌caste‌ ‌people.‌
‌4.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌according‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌:‌ ‌
(a)‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌brought‌ ‌a‌ ‌great‌ ‌hope‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌…………‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌According‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji,‌ ‌untouchability‌ ‌is‌ ‌………….‌ ‌
‌Or‌ ‌
Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌with‌ ‌their‌ ‌meanings‌ ‌:‌ ‌

(i)‌ ‌inspired‌ hated‌ ‌
(ii)‌ ‌humanity‌ encouraged.‌ ‌
mankind‌ ‌

Answer:
1.‌ ‌People‌ ‌listened‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌spellbound‌ ‌because‌ ‌his‌ ‌spiritual‌ ‌message‌ ‌appealed‌ ‌to‌ ‌every‌ ‌heart.‌ ‌
2.‌ ‌He‌ ‌said‌ ‌that‌ ‌the‌ ‌distinctions‌ ‌of‌ ‌caste‌ ‌or‌ ‌colour‌ ‌are‌ ‌meaningless.‌ ‌They‌ ‌are‌ ‌all‌ ‌man‌ ‌made.‌
‌3.‌ ‌(a)‌ ‌True‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌False.‌ ‌
4.‌ ‌(a)‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji‌ ‌brought‌ ‌a‌ ‌great‌ ‌hope‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌poor,‌ ‌weak‌ ‌and‌ ‌backward.‌ ‌
(b)‌ ‌According‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ravidas‌ ‌Ji,‌ ‌untouchability‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌sin‌ ‌against‌ ‌humanity.‌ ‌
Or‌ ‌
(i)‌ ‌inspired – encouraged‌ ‌
(ii)‌ ‌humanity – mankind

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

Use‌ ‌of‌ ‌Words‌ ‌and‌ ‌Phrases‌ ‌in‌ ‌Sentences‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌arrogance – His‌ ‌arrogance‌ ‌brought‌ ‌about‌ ‌his‌ ‌downfall.
‌2.‌ ‌exhort -‌ ‌The‌ ‌teacher‌ ‌exhorted‌ ‌him‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌hard.‌
‌3.‌ ‌fragrance‌ ‌- The‌ ‌fragrance‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌attracts‌ ‌the‌ ‌bees.‌ ‌
4.‌ ‌humanity -‌ ‌We‌ ‌should‌ ‌serve‌ ‌the‌ ‌suffering‌ ‌humanity.‌
‌5.‌ ‌Impair -‌ ‌Direct‌ ‌sunlight‌ ‌can‌ ‌impair‌ ‌the‌ ‌eyesight.‌ ‌
6.‌ ‌long-desire ‌- She‌ ‌longed‌ ‌to‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌ ‌son.‌ ‌
7.‌ ‌reflective – He‌ ‌went‌ ‌into‌ ‌a‌ ‌reflective‌ ‌mood‌ ‌after‌ ‌hearing‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌saint.‌ ‌
8.‌ ‌spiritual -‌ ‌He‌ ‌leads‌ ‌a‌ ‌spiritual‌ ‌life.‌ ‌
9.‌ ‌sermon – ‌The‌ ‌priest‌ ‌was‌ ‌giving‌ ‌a‌ ‌sermon.‌ ‌
10.‌ ‌vigour – She‌ ‌worked‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌renewed‌ ‌vigour.‌ ‌

Word-Meanings

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji 1
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji 3

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

Saint Ravidas Ji Summary in Hindi

India has been…………..in deep smadhi.

भारत सदा से ही साधुओं और संतों का घर रहा है। जब कभी भी लोगों के नैतिक अथवा सामाजिक जीवन में गिरावट आती दिखती है, तो कोई-न-कोई संत अथवा पैगम्बर अवतरित होता है। रविदास जी भी ऐसे ही संत थे जिन्होंने हिंदू सामाजिक-व्यवस्था को नया जीवन और नई ऊर्जा प्रदान की। रविदास जी का जन्म 1377 ई० में हिन्दुओं के पवित्र शहर बनारस में हुआ।

उनके माता-पिता उन्हें शिक्षा दिलवाना चाहते थे। उन्होंने उन्हें स्कूल भेजा। दुर्भाग्यवश वह स्कूल में खुश नहीं थे और वह वहां से चले गए। स्कूल के जीवन से उन्हें समाज की बुराइयों का पता चला। संत रविदास जी ने यह अनुभव किया कि निम्न (कही जाने वाली) जाति वाले परिवार में पैदा होने वाले बच्चे से समाज में अच्छा व्यवहार नहीं किया जाता। ऐसे प्रतिकूल वातावरण में बालक रविदास जी पढ़ाई में मन न लगा सके। वह प्रायः अकेले बैठ जाते और गहरी सोच में डूब जाते थे। उस समय ऐसा लगता था मानों वह गहरी समाधि में हों।

Ravidas Ji had no ………….. in the bushes.

रविदास जी की भौतिक वस्तुओं में रुचि नहीं थी। उनकी रुचि आत्मा से जुड़े विषयों में थी। वह आध्यात्मिक ज्ञान प्राप्त करना चाहते थे। वह किसी आध्यात्मिक गुरु की तलाश में थे जो उन्हें सही मार्ग दिखा सके। शीघ्र ही वह स्वामी रामानन्दजी के शिष्य बन गए। संत रविदास जी स्वामी जी के पास कुछ समय रहे। अब उनका जीवन पूरी तरह बदल गया।

स्वामी रामानन्द जी के प्रवचनों ने उनके युवा मन पर गहरा प्रभाव डाला। इन प्रवचनों द्वारा वह जीवन की सच्चाई को समझने लगे। उन्हें प्राचीन भारतीय ज्ञान तथा संस्कृति के बारे में पता चला। भूमि तैयार थी, बीज बोया गया और फसल पकने में देर न लगी। जब गुरु जी सन्तुष्ट हो गए कि संत रविदास जी में आत्मा की ज्योति सदा के लिए पूरी तरह प्रज्वलित हो चुकी है तो उन्होंने रविदास जी को घर लौट जाने को कहा और उन्हें अपनी इच्छा से जीवन व्यतीत करने को कहा।

आध्यात्मिक प्रबुद्ध शिष्य ने अब अनुभव किया कि उन्हें एक दैवीय मिशन को पूरा करना है। उन्होंने अपनी भविष्य की गतिविधियों के लिए बनारस को चुना। रविदास जी ने अनुभव किया कि आध्यात्मिक जीवन में उनका प्रशिक्षण अभी पूरा नहीं हुआ। उनमें अधिक से अधिक आध्यात्मिक ज्ञान प्राप्त करने की जिज्ञासा थी। इसके लिए उन्होंने जंगल के एक क्षेत्र को सुन्दर बनाने का निश्चय किया जहां वह शांति से ध्यान लगा सके। एक दिन झाड़ियों में अचानक होने वाली हलचल से उनका ध्यान भंग हो गया।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

Ravidas Ji got up…………..as a human child.”

रविदास जी उठे और उन्होंने चारों ओर देखा। एक हिरणी एक शिकारी द्वारा बिछाए जाल में फंस गई थी। बेचारा पशु आजादी के लिए संघर्ष कर रहा था। जैसे ही शिकारी उसके पास पहुंचा, उसने याचना भरी दृष्टि से उसे देखा। ऐसे लग रहा था जैसे वह दया की भीख मांग रही हो। यह उसका अपने तीन बच्चों को दूध पिलाने का समय था।

तीन छोटे बच्चे खुशी-खुशी उछलते-कूदते उसके पास आए परन्तु वे अपनी मां की दयनीय दशा को देखकर घबरा गए। मां और छोटे बच्चे दया और लाचारी की एक दुःख भरी तस्वीर बने हुए थे। । उनकी मूक याचना और उनकी उदासी भरी आंखें किसी पत्थर दिल को भी पिघला सकती थीं। परन्तु क्रूर शिकारी का मन नहीं पिघला। उसकी आँखों में सहानुभूति अथवा उदारता का कोई भाव नहीं था। वह पशु और उसके बच्चों को पकड़ने के लिए आगे बढ़ा।

जैसे ही रविदास जी ने उन्हें देखा, उनका मन दया से पिघल उठा। उन्होंने अनुभव किया कि दुःखी और लाचार पशुओं को मौत से बचाना उनका कर्त्तव्य है। वह शिकारी के पास गए और इस प्रकार बोले : “हम सभी एक ही ईश्वर की संतान हैं। वह हमारे स्नेहशील पिता हैं। यह ईश्वरीय सुगन्ध ही है जो मनुष्य के सीने में प्रेम के रूप में धड़कती है।

यह ईश्वरीय सुगन्ध गुलाब में खुशबू के रूप में रहती है। यही ईश्वरीय सुगन्ध है जो इन्द्रधनुष को सुन्दरता से भर देती है। यह भी ईश्वरीय सुगन्ध है जो पक्षियों में आनन्द, सेबों में रस तथा वाणी में मधुरता भरती है। इसलिए हमें इस पृथ्वी पर रहने वाले सभी जीवों से प्यार करना चाहिए। सभी प्रकार का जीवन पवित्र होता है। मनुष्य का यह सबसे पवित्र कर्तव्य है कि वह दुःखी मन को शान्ति पहुंचाए।

हमें कभी भी किसी जीव को पीड़ा एवं कष्ट नहीं पहुंचाना चाहिए और न ही मारना चाहिए। हमें छोटी-बड़ी सभी वस्तुओं से प्रेम करना चाहिए। यहां तक कि घास में रहने वाला छोटा सा कीड़ा भी उतना ही पवित्र है जितना कि मनुष्य का बच्चा।”

The hunter listened………….all man-made.

शिकारी ने रविदास जी के दयापूर्ण शब्दों को सुना और संत के प्रति बड़ा आदर भाव दिखाया। संत रविदास जी के व्यक्तित्व के जादू और उनके गहरे ज्ञान से भरे शब्दों ने शिकारी के मन से सभी बुरे विचार निकाल दिए। एक महान संत के साथ केवल क्षण भर के सम्पर्क ने उसे पूरी तरह से बदल डाला। एक हत्यारे का मन प्रभु और उसकी रचना के प्रति प्रेम से भर गया।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 3 Saint Ravidas Ji

शिकारी ने वचन दिया कि वह दयापूर्ण जीवन व्यतीत करेगा और किसी को भी कष्ट नहीं पहुंचाएगा। संत रविदास जी एक विनम्र व्यक्ति थे। वह अपने समय के अधिकतर विद्वानों और धार्मिक व्यक्तियों से भिन्न थे। उन्होंने कभी भी अपने ज्ञान और बुद्धिमत्ता की शेखी नहीं बघेरी थी। उन्हें ईश्वरीय ज्ञान सीधा अपनी अात्मा से प्राप्त हुआ था। उनके आध्यात्मिक प्रवचन सभी को प्रभावित करते थे। लोग उन्हें मंत्रमुग्ध होकर सुनते थे। वह सरल और स्पष्ट भाषा में बोलते थे। उन्होंने लोगों को बताया कि परमात्मा की दृष्टि में सभी समान हैं। जाति, रंग और धर्म के भेदभाव व्यर्थ हैं। ये सब मनुष्य के बनाये हैं।

Saint Ravidas Ji………..the eternal soul.

संत रविदास जी उन लोगों के लिए बड़ी आशा लेकर आए जो निर्धन, कमज़ोर तथा पिछड़े हुए थे। उन्होंने उनके मन में आशा, साहस और भरोसा भरा। उन्होंने उन्हें उच्च जाति के लोगों की अन्यायपूर्ण मांगों के आगे न झुकने के लिए प्रेरित किया। उन्होंने उन्हें आत्मा की शक्ति पहचानने की प्रेरणा दी। उन्होंने उन्हें सभी कमज़ोर भावनाओं से दूर रहने के लिए कहा।

वह हमेशा कहते थे, “छुआछूत (अस्पृश्यता) मानवता के विरुद्ध पाप है।” संत रविदास जी जीवन भर अपने समय के समाज को सुधारने और उसका मार्गदर्शन करने में जुटे रहे। यहाँ तक कि वृद्धावस्था में भी उनके चेहरे पर दैवीय चमक (आभा) बनी रही। उनकी सभी मानसिक क्षमताएं सदैव सशक्त बनी रहीं। भौतिक संसार के तनावों से उनकी आत्मा अछूती रही। उन्होंने आध्यात्मिक जीवन बिताया। उनका अन्त शान्तिपूर्वक हुआ। इस संसार की एक महान् आत्मा परमात्मा में विलीन हो गई।

Retranslation From English to Hindi

1. India has been a home for saint and sages. — भारत साधु-संतों का घर रहा है।
2. They sent him to school. — उन्होंने उसे स्कूल भेजा।
3. The seed was sown. — बीज बो दिया गया।
4. The field was ready. — खेत तैयार था।
5. God is our loving Father. — ईश्वर हमारे स्नेहशील पिता हैं।
6. Saint Ravidas Ji was very humble. — संत रविदास जी बहुत ही विनम्र थे।
7. His end was peaceful. — उनका अंत शांतिमय था।
8. All forms of life are sacred. — जीवन के सभी रूप पवित्र हैं।
9. They are all men-made. — ये सब मनुष्य के बनाये हैं।
10. All are equal in the eyes of God.— ईश्वर की नज़र में सभी समान हैं।

English Guide for Class 8 PSEB Prose

Safety While Driving Question Answer Class 8 English Solutions Chapter 7 PSEB Solutions

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class English Book Solutions Chapter 7 Safety While Driving Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Class 8th English Solutions Chapter 7 Safety While Driving Question Answers

Safety While Driving Class 8 Questions and Answers

Activity 1

Look up the following words in a dictionary. You should seek the following information about the words and put them in your WORDS notebook.

1. Meaning of the word as used in the lesson (adjective/noun/verb. etc.)
2. Pronunciation (The teacher may refer to the dictionary or a mobile phone for correct pronunciation.)
3. Spellings.

mischief itinerary sneak reverse mechanism
confidence impound counsel blunder reflexes

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

Vocabulary Expansion

Activity 2

Look at the grid. Encircle the words taken from the chapter which mean the following. The first one is done for you.
1. a person who walks on the road
2. alert and careful
3. when two vehicles get hit
4. to take into custody of the law
5. mistake
6. to turn in an opposite direction
7. eager and enthusiastic
8. the effect, result or outcome of something
9. advice ; opinion or instruction given
10. a person under the age of 18 in India.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving 1

Activity 3.

Match the words given in the table with their antonyms. Write the number of the word in the column given on the right hand side. The first one is done for you.

S. No. Word Antonym Number
1. above never 9
2. absent after 8
3. accept alive 12
4. advantage depart 7
5. before cruel 2
6. for light 13
7. agree disadvantage 10
8. dead present 3
9. always below 1
10. question disagree 11
11. appear answer 20
12. arrive decline 4
13. kind against 5
14. M careless 19
15. front ugly 16
16. beautiful back 15
17. below above 17
18. heavy sharp 6
19.   blunt empty 18
20. careful disappear 14

Answer:
1. above – below
2. absent – present
3. accept – decline
4. advantage – disadvantage
5. before – after
6. for – against
7. agree – disagree
8. dead – alive
9. always – never
10. question – answer
11. appear – disappear
12. arrive – depart
13. kind – cruel
14. full – empty
15. front – back
16. beautiful – ugly
17. below – above
18. heavy – light
19. blunt – sharp
20. careful – careless.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

Learning to Read and Comprehend

Activity 4

Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
What does Seema love ?
सीम्त को क्या पसंद है ?
Answer:
Seema loves automobiles.

Question 2.
What does she read on the Internet ?
वह इंटरनेट पर क्या पढ़ती है ?
Answer:
She reads a lot about cars and their mechanism on the Internet.

Question 3.
Why did she call her friend Bhavya ?
उसने अपनी मित्र भावया को क्यों बुलाया ?
Answer:
She called Bhavya because she knew a lot about driving.

Question 4.
What did Seema and Bhavya decide ?
सीमा और भावया ने क्या निश्चय किया ?
Answer:
They decided to drive the car.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

Question 5.
What was their itinerary?
उनकी यात्रा योजना क्या थी ?
Answer:
They planned to go to Sector-17.

Question 6.
Who did they meet at the end of the road ?
सड़क के अन्त में उन्हें कौन मिला ?
Answer:
They met the two traffic policemen at the end of the road.

Question 7.
What did the police do?
पुलिस ने क्या किया ?
Answer:
The police impounded the car and took them to the police station for writing the report.

Question 8.
How did the police counsel Seema and Bhavya ?
पुलिस ने सीमा और भावया को कैसे सलाह (समझाया) दी ?
Answer:
They advised them not to go for driving until they are 18. Otherwise, they may involve in serious accident. Driving for a minor is illegal too.

Question 9.
What did Seema and Bhavya decide after the counselling ?
सलाह के बाद सीमा और भावया ने क्या निर्णय लिया ?
Answer:
After the counselling they decided that they would never repeat such blunder.

Activity 5

Discuss (Groupwork)

A. What mistake did the two girls commit? Had the police not caught them near their home, what could have happened to them ?
B. What are the two most important traffic rules that we all should follow ? Why do you think it is important to follow traffic rules?
C. Why is it important for everyone on the road to be patient ?
Answer:
(A) The two girls were minor, still they planned to drive on the busy road. Had the police not caught them they might have done a very serious accident.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving
(B)

  • We should follow the traffic lights.
  • We should follow the traffic signals. Traffic rules are for the road safety so we must follow them.

(C) It is important to be patient on the road because impatience causes accidents and quarrels.

Learning Language

Active and Passive Voice Voice is the form of a verb that shows its connection with the subject. It is of two kinds:

  • Active Voice
  • Passive Voice

Active Voice : When the verb shows that the subject does something, it is said to be in the Active Voice.
Passive Voice : Passive Voice shows that something is done to the subject.

Example :
Ram eats an apple. (Active Voice)
An apple is eaten by Ram. (Passive Voice)

Need for changing from Active to Passive Voice :
Passive voice is generally used in the following cases :
1. Where the subject is obvious, for example :
(a) The letters were delivered. (by the postman).
(b) My tooth was extracted this morning only. (by the dentist)
(In these examples, the subjects in the active voice ‘the postman’ and ‘the dentist need not be mentioned as it is obvious who the doer is.)

2. Where the subject is not known, for example :
(a) My pen was stolen. (by someone)
(b) The window pane was broken. (by someone)
(In these examples, the identity of the subject in the active voice is not known.)

3. Where the identity of the subject is not meant to be revealed, for example
(a) Ratan was dismissed from his job. (passive)
[The boss/the management dismissed Ratan from his job. (active)]

(b) Rajan was killed. (passive)
[The goons killed Rajan. (active)]

4. In writing scientific procedures and reports, for example :
(a) Twenty millilitres of sulphuric acid was taken in a test-tube and heated.

5. Where the action is more important than the doer or the subject, for example :
(a) The repair work of the roads has been completed.

Rules to change the Voice :

  • The object of the verb takes the position of the subject.
  • The subject of the verb in the active voice becomes the object and is usually preceded by the preposition by’:
  • The tense of the verb in the passive voice remains the same as in the active voice.
  • In the passive voice, the third form of the verb is used.
  • Appropriate form of the verb to be [is, am, are, been, have been, had been, was, were, will be, shall be, etc.) is used with the past participle form (third form of the verb) in the passive voice.

Passive form of Negative Sentences :

Rule : The passive form of sentences is formed by putting ‘not’ between the auxiliary and the third form of the verb. The other rules remain the same.

Active : Tigers do not eat grass.
Passive : Grass is not eaten by tigers.
Active : He does not grow green vegetables.
Passive : Green vegetables are not grown by him.

Passive of Interrogative Sentences :

A. Interrogative sentences beginning with helping verbs :

Rules :
1. If the question begins with do/does/did, the passive form will be is/am/are/was/ were + subject + 3rd form of the verb.
Examples :
Active : Do many people watch this serial ?
Passive : Is this serial watched by many people ?
Active : Did you complete your work in time ?
Passive : Was your work completed by you in time ?

2. If the question is in continuous tense, the passive form will be is/am/are/was/ were + subject + being + 3rd form of the verb.
Examples :
Active : Is she making coffee?
Passive : Is coffee being made by her ?
Active : Were they playing hockey?
Passive : Was hockey being played by them?

3. If the question begins with has/have/had, the passive form will be has/havel had + subject + been + 3rd form of the verb.
Example :
Active : Has he written the letter?
Passive : Has the letter been written by him ?

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

4. If the question begins with modal auxiliary, the passive structure is modal auxiliary + subject + be + 3rd form of the verb.
Example : Active : Can you sing a song ?
Passive : Can a song be sung by you ?

A. Interrogative sentences beginning with ‘Wh’ words

Rules :
In the case of interrogative sentences beginning with Wh-words like ‘what’, ‘why’, ‘when’, etc. the question word is written in the beginning of the sentences. The rest of the rules are the same as in the case of other interrogative sentences.
Examples :
Active : Why did you cut down the tree ?
Passive : Why was the tree cut down by you?
Active : Where do you keep the books ?
Passive : Where are the books kept by you ?

In case of questions beginning with ‘who’, the passive form is ; by+whom+auxiliary + subject+ 3rd form of the verb. Examples :
Active : Who will make a kite ?
Passive : By whom will a kite be made ?
Active : Who will bell the cat ?
Passive : By whom will the cat be belled ?

Note : An interrogative sentence in the Active Voice remains an interrogative in the Passive form also.

Change of voice involving Tenses ·

1. Simple Present (Indefinite) Tense
Rule : is/am/are + 3rd form of the verb
Examples : Active : Mohan sings a song.
Passive : A song is sung by Mohan.
Active : Uncle Podger hangs a picture.
Passive : A picture is hung by Uncle Podger.

Activity 6.

Change the active voice of the following sentences to passive voice :
(a) Harish plays cricket.
Answer:
Cricket is played by Harish.

(b) She does not like singing.
Answer:
Singing is not liked by her.

(c) We fly kites.
Answer:
Kites are flown by us.

(d) Meera helps the poor.
Answer:
The poor are helped by Meera.

(e) I do my work.
Answer:
My work is done by me.

(f) Hamid does his homework.
Answer:
His home work is done by Hamid.

(g) The boys do not watch television.
Answer:
Television is not watched by the boys.

(h) Does the cobbler mend my shoes ?
Answer:
Are my shoes mended by the cobbler ?

(i) She hates liars.
Answer:
Liars are hated by her.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

(j) Do children like sweets ?
Answer:
Are sweets liked by children ?

Simple Past (Indefinite) Tense

Rule : was/were + 3rd form of the verb
Examples :
Active : Kapil Dev broke the record.
Passive : The record was broken by Kapil Dev.
Active : The Principal punished the boys.
Passive : The boys were punished by the Principal.

Activity 7.

Change the active voice in following sentences to passive voice:

(a) Rama lost his book.
Answer:
His book was lost by Rama.

(b) They welcomed me.
Answer:
I was welcomed by them.

(c) Mina wrote a letter.
Answer:
A letter was written by Mina.

(d) Mohan did not sing a song.
Answer:
A song was not sung by Mohan.

(e) Radha did not drink coffee.
Answer:
Coffee was not drunk by Radha.

(f) Harish did not paint a picture
Answer:
A picture was not painted by Harish.

(g) Did the boys fly kites ?
Answer:
Were the kites flown by the boys ?

(h) Did you close the door ?
Answer:
Was the door closed by you ?

(i) Did Kavita help you ?
Answer:
Were you helped by Kavita ?

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

(j) The Prime Minister honoured Sachin Tendulkar.
Answer:
Sachin Tendulkar was honoured by the Prime Minister.

Future Indefinite Tense

Rule : will/shall + be + 3rd form of the verb
Examples :
Active : He will play two matches.
Passive : Two matches will be played by him.
Active : She will help me.
Passive : I shall be helped by her.

Activity 8

Change the active voice of the following sentences to passive voice :

(a) Manohar will solve the sums.
Answer:
The sums will be solved by Manohar.

(b) You will miss your bus.
Answer:
Your bus will be missed by you.

(c) The teacher will punish the boys.
Answer:
The boys will be punished by the teacher.

(d) The doctor will examine the patient.
Answer:
The patient will be examined by the doctor.

(e) The children will enjoy this game.
Answer:
This game will be enjoyed by the children.

(f) You will join the party.
Answer:
The party will be joined by you.

(g) He will not cook the food.
Answer:
The food will not be cooked by him.

(h) She will not wash the clothes.
Answer:
The clothes will not be washed by her.

(i) Will they elect the President ?
Answer:
Will the president be elected by them ?

(j) Will she speak the truth?
Answer:
Will the truth be spoken by her ?

Learning to Listen

Activity 9.

Your teacher will read a passage on road safety. She/he will read the passage twice with a gap of 5 minutes. The passage explains some points regarding DO’s and DON’TS while driving. Make a list of DO’s and DON’Ts (3-5 words only) while you listen to your teacher. Complete your points when you listen to her the second time. ..
(The teacher must read the passage very clearly and slowly. She/he must also pause a little after each sentence.)

YOU MUST AI WAY’S (Do’s) YOU MUST NEVER (Don’t)
Always stay alert. Never write text message while driving.
Wear your seat belt. Avoid distractions like changing CD or using cellphone.
Follow traffic signals. Never drink and drive.
Stop at red light. ’
Always give right of way.
Always share the rpad.

Activity 10.

It is very important for the people who ride two wheelers to wear good and strong helmets. Discuss with your partner why people should wear helmets. You may also give examples of people whom you know were hurt because they did not wear a helmet. You must make notes of what you will say in the space given below:
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving 2
Answer:
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving 3

Now tell about the importance of helmets to your partner based on notes you have made : (The teacher must encourage at least 5 pairs to speak in front of the class.)

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

नोट : विद्यार्थी इन Hints को Sentences में बदलकर एक paragraph में लिखें

Learning to Write

Activity 11.

Picture description.
Describe what you see in the given picture. You can write about.

The vechicles involved in the accident

  • What could have happened before the accident ?
  • What caused the accident? (Choose One.)
  • jumping the red light
  • overtaking at the wrong place.
  • taking a wrong turn
  • applying sudden-brakes by one of the persons involved in the accident
  • Whose fault was it ? Why do you say so ?

It is an accident scene at a busy crossing. Two cars collapsed against each other. The accident took place because one car driver crossed the red light. The second car driver
paid for his fault. The car was badly damaged. Thanks god his own life was saved !

Learning to use Language (Groupwork)

Activity 12.

Get into a group of 5 and write a dialogue among five people of a family-mother, father, daughter and son and a cousin who has come to visit your family. :

Scenario : Your family is planning to enjoy the day. Your mother and sister are interested in watching a cricket match at the stadium while your father is fond of cooking and wants to cook a good dinner for the family followed by watching a film on TV. The cousin wants to watch a film in the theatre.

Write a dialogue in which each of you will convince other members of the family that your plan is the best.
Once done, you will also practise speaking the same in your group. (The teacher will randomly select two groups to present the dialogue before the class.)
Answer:
Mother : I would like to watch a cricket match on TV. Dear sister is also interested in it. It is very entertaining. Besides, during these days of Covid-19, it is not wise to go out.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

Father : I have a new book on cooking. It has a long list of recipes. I will do cooking for the family tomorrow. You will enjoy spicy and sweet crispy dishes-nons and Amritsari chholey Bhatoorey. In the evening we will watch a classical film on TV. It is a great movie Mughal-i-Aazam.

Cousin : What is all this. I am ready to pass my day at home. I would suggest seeing a film in a theatre. My plan is the best one.

Children : Be serious. It will be a blunder to go out. It is like spreading Corona or getting infected.

Giving and Responding to News:

It is important to understand how to break good or bad news to someone. There are different ways to do so. There are some set expressions that may be used to break the news. Knowing these expressions helps us to become more fluent.

Giving News
Good News Bad News
I’m really pleased to tell you … I’m afraid I’ve got some bad news for you …
I’ve got a bit of good news to tell you … I’m sorry I’ve got a bit of bad news to tell you …
I’ve got some good/brilliant/great/wonderful/splendid news for you … I really don’t know how to say it but….
You know what I’ve got a bit of great news for you …. I’m sorry to have to say this but …
Great news for you … I really feel bad to have to say this, but …

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

There are also ways and expressions of responding to news.

Responding to news
Good News Bad News
That’s great !/Great news ! I’m awfully sorry that…/I’m sorry to hear that…/I’m sorry to hear such terrible news.
How fantastic !/Oh, how wonderful ! Please, accept my deepest sympathy/ condolences.
What fantastic/good/brilliant/great won­derful/splendid news ! I know how you must be feeling.
That’s good/brilliant/great/wonderful/splendid news ! That must be awful.
Congratulations !/Superb ! Oh, dear !/Too bad !
That’s wonderful/Fantastic ! That’s awful/a pity/unfortunate !
I’m glad to hear that !

Activity 13:

Use five different expressions to break a piece of a good news and a bad news to your partner who will also respond in five different ways to the good news and the bad news. (Pairwork)
Some ideas for the news you may break :

  • Your friend has stood first in the test.
  • Rohit Sharma has scored a century.
  • India has won the cricket match against
  • Your father’s operation has been a success.
  • You have a new puppy at home.
  • Your friend’s sister is unwell.
  • You have failed in the test in spite of working very hard.
  • You have lost your wallet/necklace/suitcase.
  • Your laptop suddenly stopped responding.
  • You have lost your mobile phone.

Answer:
(For Each News) For Good News in the test

  • That’s great
  • What a good news
  • That’s good
  • Congratulations
  • I’m glad to hear that.

For a piece of Bad News

  • Very sad to hear that
  • Sorry you must be feeling bad !
  • That’s unfortunate
  • That must be awful!
  • Shocking

Comprehension of Pass

Read the following passages and answer the questions given below each :

(1) Seema is a fifteen year old girl. She loves automobiles and keeps dreaming about driving cars on the road. She reads a lot about cars and their mechanism on the internet. She feels that she knows everything about driving cars. Last year, Seema was just fourteen and she tried to take her mother’s car out on the road to drive without telling her mother. Here, Seema is telling her story of the day she planned this mischief.

1. What does Seema love to do?
सीमा को क्या करना पसंद है ?

2. What big mistake did she commit last year?
उसने पिछले साल क्या बड़ी गलती की ?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) Last year seema was just fifteen.
(b) Seema reads a lot about cars on the internet.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Seema feels that she knows everything …
(b) She reads about cars …………… on the internet…
Or
Match the words with their meaning :

(i) mischief pleasure
(ii) planned naughtiness
chalked out

Answer:
1. Seema loves automobiles and keeps dreaming about driving cars on the road.
2. Last year, seema tried to take her mother’s car out on the road to drive, when she was just 14.
3.
(a) False
(b) True.
4.
(a) Seema feels that she knows everything about driving cars.
(b) She reads about cars and their mechanism on the internet.
Or
(1) mischief — naughtiness
(ii) planned — chalked out

(2) I am seema. I am going to tell you a small incident of my life that taught me an important lesson. I love cars. I keep reading about cars on the Internet. After reading so much about cars and driving cars, I felt that I had understood everything about cars and would be able to safely drive on the road. I called my friend Bhavya who is equally interested in driving and also knows how to ride a mobike. I told her that my mother was going to Delhi and her car would be free. Bhavya also got excited and said that she would come to my house.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

1. How did Seema feel after reading a lot about cars and driving cars ?
कारों तथा कार चलाने के बारे में बहुत कुछ पढ़ने के बाद सीमा को कैसा महसूस हुआ ?

2. Who is Bhavya ? What is she interested in ?
भावया कौन है ? उसको किस चीज़ में रुचि है ?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) Bhavya’s mother was going to the internet.
(b) This incident is related to a lesson giving car driving experience.

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Bhavya also got ……………..
(b) Bhavya knows how to …………….
Or
Write the meanings of the following words in English : (Any two)
incident, excited, understood
Answer:
1. She felt that she had understood everything about cars and she would be able to drive safely on the road.
2. Bhavya is Seema’s friend. Like Seema, she is also interested in driving.
3.
(a) False
(b) True.
4.
(a) Bhavya also got excited.
(b) Bhavya knows how to ride a mobike.
Or
happening, thrilled, came to know.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

(3) Bhavya started driving. Since she could ride a mobike and also helped her father many times in taking the car out of the gate, she knew the mechanism and drove with confidence. As we reached the end of the road, I asked her to stop the car. As she was trying to stop the car, two traffic policemen came out from behind the trees. They asked us to come out of the car and asked Bhavya to show them her driving licence. She was only foureen years old and like me she did not have a driving licence. The policemen asked us our names, our age and addresses. They also took our parents’ mobile number and called them. My mother was on her way to Delhi. When she received the phone, she immediately called my father and asked him to meet the police. Bhavya’s father came and the policemen told him that they would impound the car as two minors were sitting in the car and one of them was driving.

1. What happned when Bhavya tried to stop the car ?
जब भावया ने कार को रोकने की कोशिश की तो क्या हुआ ?

2. Who were the two minors sitting in the car ?
कार में बैठे दो नाबालिग कौन थे ?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) Seema was driving the car.
(b) Bhavya did not have a driving licence.

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Bhavya knew the mechanism and drove ……..
(b) Seema’s mother asked seema’s father to ………
Or
Match the words with their meaning :

(i) immediately below 18
(ii) minor at once
took away

Answer:
1. Two traffic policemen came out from behind the trees, when Bhavya tried to stop the car.
2. They were Seema and Bhavya.
3.
(a) False
(b) True
4.
(a) Bhavya knew the mechanism and drove with confidence.
(b) Seema’s mother asked Seema’s father to meet the police.
Or
(i) immediately — at once
(ii) minor — below 18

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

(4) The car was impounded and the police took both of us to the police station for writing the report. They also counselled us on the consequences of what we were planning to do. They said that we could have met with an accident and we might have hurt ourselves badly. They also told us that we could have also injured someone on the road. Then they showed us picturės of some accidents. We both got very scared when we saw the pictures in which a child had died. We looked at each other and decided never to repeat such a blunder. We decided that we will learn how to drive from a driving school when we turn eighteen.

1. What did the police tell the two girls about the consequences of the incident ?
पुलिस ने दोनों लड़कियों को घटना के परिणामों के बारे में क्या बताया ?

2. What did they decide about learning driving?
ड्राइविंग सीखने के बारे में उन्होंने कया फैसला बताया?

3. Choose true the false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) We might have met with an accident.
(b) We were free after the car was impounded.

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) They decided never to repeat …………
(b) The police took us to the police station for …………….
Or
Write the meanings of the following words in English : (Any two).
blunder, consequences, injured.
Answer:
1. The police told them that they could meet with a serious accident. They could hurt themselves badly. They might hurt someone else also.
2. They decided that they would learn driving from a driving school when they turn 18.
3.
(a) True
(b) False.
4.
(a) They decided never to repeat such a blunder.
(b) The police took us to the police station for writing the report.
Or
big mistake, results, wounded.

Use of words and phrases in Sentences

1. Blunder (a big mistake) -You have committed a blunder.
2. Excited (thrilled) – The players were excited when they scored the last goal.
3. Confidence (belief/trust) – He fights every battle with self confidence.
4. Mischief (misconduct) – Every mischief can’t be forgiven.
5. Received (got) – I received his phone early in the morning.
6. Minor (a person below 18) – A minor is not allowed to drive a car on the road.
7. Injured (wounded) – Ten persons were injured in the road accident.
8. Scared (got afraid) – We got scared to hear the story of her accident.
9. Skill (talent) – We need practice to learn every skill.
10. Cautious (alert) – Be cautious while driving.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

Word Meanings

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving 4

Safety While Driving Summary in Hindi

Seema is a fifteen year ……………come to my house.

सीमा पंद्रह वर्ष की लड़की है। उसे मोटर-गाड़ियों से प्यार है और वह सड़क पर कार चलाने के सपने देखती रहती है। वह कारों के बारे में और उनके कलपुर्जी की बनावट के बारे में इंटरनेट पर पढ़ती रहती है। उसे लगता है कि वह कार चलाने के बारे में सब जानती है। पिछले वर्ष सीमा जब चौदह वर्ष की थी तो उसने माँ को बताए बिना उसकी कार को सड़क पर ले जाने की कोशिश की। यहाँ सीमा अपनी उस दिन की कहानी बता रही है जिस दिन उसने यह शरारत करने की सोची थी। मैं सीमा हूँ। मैं आपको अपने जीवन की एक घटना बताने जा रही हूँ जिससे मुझे जीवन की महत्त्वपूर्ण सीख मिली। मुझे कारें पसंद हैं। मैं कारों के बारे में इंटरनेट पर पढ़ती रहती हूँ। कारों के बारे में तथा कार चलाने के बारे में इतना अधिक पढ़ने के बाद मुझे लगा मुझे कारों के बारे में सब कुछ पता चल चुका है और मैं सड़क पर सुरक्षित गाड़ी चला सकती हूं। मैंने अपनी मित्र भावया (Bhavya) को बुलाया जो कि ड्राइविंग की बराबर की शौकीन है और उसे पता है कि कैसे मोबाइक चलाई जाती है। मैंने उसे बताया कि मेरी मां दिल्ली जा रही है और उसकी कार फ्री है। भावया । भी रोमांचित हो उठी और उसने कहा कि वह मेरे घर आ जाएगी।

The next day …. turn to drive.

अगली सुबह मेरी मां दिल्ली चली गई और मैंने भावया को घर पर बुला लिया। भावया घर आ गई और हम अपने यात्रा कार्यक्रम की योजना बनाने लगे। हमने सैक्टर 17, जो कि एक बड़ा शापिंग कम्पलैक्स है, जाने की योजना बनाई। क्योंकि गाड़ी चलाने का यह मेरा पहला अनुभव था इसलिए मैंने भावया से कार को गैराज से निकालने के लिए कहा। __ हम कार की चाबियाँ लेकर छिपकर घर से बाहर निकल आए। भावया ड्राइवर की सीट पर बैठ गई और कार को पीछे की ओर चलाने लगी। भावया ने बहुत ही आत्मविश्वास से कार को बाहर निकाला। हम दोनों बहुत खुश थे। मैंने उसे सड़क के अंत तक कार को चलाते रहने के लिए कहा और उसके बाद कार चलाने की मैं अपनी बारी लूंगी।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

Bhavya started .. …………… was driving.

भावया ने कार चलाना आरम्भ किया। क्योंकि वह मोबाइक चला सकती थी और उसने कार को गैराज से निकालने में अपने पिता की कई बार मदद की थी, उसे कार तंत्र की भी जानकारी थी, उसने बड़े आत्मविश्वास से गाड़ी चलाई। जैसे ही हम सड़क के अंतिम किनारे पर पहुंचे, मैंने उसे कार रोकने के लिए कहा। जैसे ही वह कार रोकने की कोशिश कर रही थी, दो ट्रैफिक पुलिस कर्मचारी पेड़ के पीछे से निकल आए। उन्होंने हमें कार से बाहर आने के लिए कहा और भावया को अपना ड्राइविंग लाइसेंस दिखाने के लिए कहा। वह चौदह वर्ष की थी और मेरी तरह उसके पास भी ड्राइविंग लाइसेंस नहीं था। पुलिस कर्मचारी ने हमारे नाम, आयु तथा पते पूछे। उन्होंने हमारे माता-पिता के मोबाइल नम्बर लेकर उनसे बात की। मेरी माँ दिल्ली के रास्ते में थी। जैसे ही उनके पास फोन पहुंचा उन्होंने तुरंत मेरे पिता जी को पुलिस से मिलने के लिए कहा। भावया के पिता आए और पुलिस कर्मचारी ने उन्हें बताया कि वे कार को इम्पाउंड करेंगे क्योंकि कार में दो नाबालिग बैठी थीं और उनमें से एक चला रही थी।

The car was ……. first when driving.

कार इम्पाउंड (जब्त) कर ली गई और पुलिस रिपोर्ट लिखने के लिए हमें पुलिस स्टेशन ले गई। उन्होंने हमें जो कुछ हम करने जा रहे थे, उनके परिणामों के बारे में सलाह भी दी। उन्होंने हमें बताया कि हमारी दुर्घटना हो सकती थी और हम बुरी तरह से घायल भी हो सकती थीं। उन्होंने हमें बताया कि हम किसी और को भी सड़क पर घायल कर सकते थे। उन्होंने हमें कुछ दुर्घटनाओं के चित्र भी दिखाए। हम दोनों उस समय बहुत डर गए जब हमने चित्रों में एक बच्चे को मरते हुए देखा। हमने एक दूसरे की ओर देखा और निश्चय किया कि ऐसी भयंकर गलती फिर से नहीं करेंगे। हमने निश्चय किया कि जब हम अठारह वर्ष की हो जाएंगी तो ड्राइविंग स्कूल से कार चलाने का प्रशिक्षण लेंगी। यही थी सीमा की कहानी।

कार तंत्रों की जानकारी होने से आप एक अच्छे ड्राइवर नहीं बन जाते। ड्राइविंग एक कौशल है जो कि बहुत अभ्यास से सीखा जाता है। सड़क के नियमों को जानना और ट्रैफिक संकेतों को समझना बहुत आवश्यक है। ट्रैफिक लाइट्स लोगों को दर्शाती हैं कि कब सड़क पार करना सुरक्षित है और कब रुकना। सड़क के नियम और ट्रैफिक संकेत सड़क का प्रयोग करने वालों की सुरक्षा के लिए हैं। सड़क पर निकलने के बाद हम सबको बहुत ही सावधान रहना चाहिए। ड्राइवरों को धैर्यवान, दूसरों का ध्यान रखने वाला और सजग होना चाहिए। पैदल चलने वालों को सहनशील, सावधान और सतर्क होना चाहिए। सदा याद रखें गाड़ी चलाते समय सुरक्षा पहली चीज़ होती है।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Safety Chapter 7 Safety While Driving

Retranslation from english to hindi

1. Seema is a fifteen year old girl. — सीमा पंद्रह वर्ष की लड़की है।
2. She reads a lot about cars. — वह कारों के बारे में पढ़ती रहती है।
3. Seema is telling her story of the day. — सीमा अपनी कहानी बता रही है।
4. I love cars. — मुझे कारें पसंद हैं।
5. I called my friend Bhavya. — मैंने अपनी मित्र भावया को बुलाया।
6. Bhavya also got excited. — भावया भी रोमांचित हो उठी।
7. We planned to go to sector 17. — हमने सेक्टर 17 में जाने की योजना बनाई।
8. We sneaked out of the house with the car keys. — हम कार की चाबियां लेकर छिपकर घर से बाहर आ गए।
9. Bhavya took out the car very confidently. — भावया ने बहुत ही आत्म-विश्वास से कार को बाहर निकाला।
10. I asked her to stop the car. — मैंने उसे कार रोकने के लिए कहा।
11. They asked us to come out of the car. — उन्होंने हमें कार से बाहर आने के लिए कहा।
12. My mother was on her way to Delhi. — मेरी माँ दिल्ली के रास्ते में थी।
13. They showed us pictures of some accidents. — उन्होंने हमें कुछ दुर्घटनाओं के चित्र दिखाए।
14. Driving is a skill. — ड्राइविंग एक कौशल है।
15. We all need to be very careful. — हम सबको बहुत ही सावधान रहना चाहिए।

English Guide for Class 8 PSEB Prose

My Dear Soldiers Question Answer Class 8 English Solutions Poem Chapter 4 PSEB Solutions

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class English Book Solutions Poem 4 My Dear Soldiers Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Class 8th English Solutions Poem Chapter 4 My Dear Soldiers Question Answers

My Dear Soldiers Class 8 Questions and Answers

Activity 1.

Look up the following words in a dictionary. You should seek the following information about the words and put them in your WORDS notebook.
1. Meaning of the word as used in the poem (adjective/noun/verb. etc.)
2. Pronunciation (The teacher may refer to the dictionary or a mobile phone for correct pronunciation.)
3. Spellings.

defenders border deed windy scorching
sweltering treading marshes surveillance vibrate

Vocabulary Expansion

Activity 2.

Write synonyms of the following words.

(a) very hot – Scorching
(b) protect – defend

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 4 My Dear Soldiers

Read the following pairs of words carefully.

1. great sons
2. windy season
3. snowy days
4. scorching sun

All the highlighted words are ‘adjectives’ and the partner words are ‘nouns.’ Sometimes adjectives can be changed to nouns. For example ‘beautiful is an adjective. The noun from the adjective ‘beautiful is ‘beauty’

Sr. No. Adjective Noun
1. strong wind
2. active members
3. rich people
4. wise men
5. loyal soldiers
6. careful student
7. kind person
8. happy lad
9. good friend
10. faithful dog

Learning to Read and Comprehend

Activity 4.

Read the stanza and answer the questions that follow.

A. Oh! Defenders of borders
You are great sons of my land
When we are all asleep in
You still hold on to your deed.
Windy season or snowy days
Or scorching sun’s sweltering rays
You are there guarding all the time awake
Treading the lonely expanses as Yogis.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 4 My Dear Soldiers

(a) Name the poet of the poem ‘My Dear Soldiers’.
‘My Dear Soldiers’ कविता के लेखक का नाम बताएं
Answer:
The poet of this poem is A.P.J. Abdul Kalam.

(b) Who are being referred to as ‘Defenders of borders’ ?
‘सीमाओं का रक्षक’ किसे कहा जा रहा है
Answer:
Indian soldiers are being referred to Defenders of Borders’.

(c) How do these great sons serve their motherland ?
ये महान सपूत मातृभूमि की सेवा कैसे करते हैं ?
Answer:
They guard the borders of their motherland day and night.

(d) What kind of weather conditions do the soldiers have to face ?
सैनिक किस प्रकार की मौसमी दशाओं का सामना करते हैं ?
Answer:
They face windy and snowy weather.

B. Climbing the heights or striding the valleys
Defending the desert guarding the marshes
Surveillance in seas and by securing the air
Prime of your youth given to the nation!!
Wind chimes of my land vibrate your feat
We pray for you brave men!!
May the Lord bless you all!!

(a) Whom has the poem been addressed to ?
कविता किसे संबोधित की गई है ?
Answer:
The poem is addressed to the Indian soldiers.

(b) What do these great sons sacrifice for the nation ?
ये महान सपूत राष्ट्र के लिए क्या त्याग करते हैं ?
Answer:
They sacrifice their lives and their youth for the nation.

(c) What is the intention of the poet ?
कवि का इरादा क्या है?
Answer:
The poet wishes to tribute to our brave soldiers. He also wishes that they should enjoy God’s blessings.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 4 My Dear Soldiers

(d) Explain: ‘Wind chimes of my land vibrate your feat’.
व्याख्या कीजिए : “मेरे देश की पावन की झंकार तुम्हारे कदमों में सुनाई देती है”
Answer:
It means that our soldiers march forward with rhythmical sound.

Learning Language

Formation of Adverbs

A large number of adverbs are formed by adding ‘-ly’ to certain adjectives.

1. Most of the adverbs formed this way are the Adverbs of Manner. For example :

Sl.No Adjective Adverb 
1. strong strongly
2. faithful faithfully
3. sincere sincerely
4. quick quickly
5. slow slowly
6. neat ready
7. busy busily.
8. happy happily
9. true truly
10. severe severely

2. Some adverbs have the same form as the corresponding adjectives. For example :

S. No Adjective Adverb
1. Fie put in a lot of hard work. He worked hard.
2. I want a little sugar. Please move a little.
3. Fie has high aims. He aims high in life.
4. I want an early reply. Please reply early.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 4 My Dear Soldiers

3. Some adverbs are formed by combining a noun and a qualifying adjective. For example : yesterday, otherwise, meanwhile, sometimes.
4. Some adverbs are formed by adding a noun to ‘a’, ‘be’ and ‘to’, etc. For example : today, abreast, ahead, besides, etc.
5. Some adverbs are formed by combining ‘à or ‘be’ and an adjective. For example : aloud, anew, behind, aloud, alone, etc.
6. Some adverbs are formed from participles. For example : wittingly, surprisingly, knowingly, etc.
7. Some adverbs are formed in the following ways. For example : 1… one

1. one once
2. two twice
3. three thrice
4. four fourfold
5. many manifold

8. There are several adverbs which we used together having been joined together with
conjunctions to form adverbial phrases. For example :
(a) by and by (within a short period)
(b) again and again
(c) far and wide
(d) first and foremost
(e) to and fro
(f) off and on (occasionally) etc.

Activity 5.

Change the following adjectives to adverbs.

S. No. Adjective Adverb
1. bad badly
2. angry angrily
3. fast faddy
4. bold boldly
5. brisk briskly
6. meek meekly
7. nice nicely
8. soft softly
9. fair fairly
10. clean cleanly

Activity 6.

In the following sentences, same words are used both as an adjective and as an adverb. Underline the word and write whether it is used as an adjective or an adverb.

(a) You gave a beautiful, presentation. — ‘beautiful’ as an adjective
(b) Your work is beautifully presented. — ‘beautifully as an adverb
(c) I get a monthly paycheque. — ‘monthly’ as an adjective
(d) My company pays me monthly. — ‘monthly’ as an adverb
(e) She dressed elegantly. — ‘elegandy’ as an adverb
(f) She looks very elegant in suit.– ‘elegant’ as an adjective
(g) That boy is so loud. — ‘loud’ as an adjective
(h) That boy speaks so loudly. — ‘loudly as an adverb
(i) He is a gentle person. — ‘gently as an adjective
(j) He hugged me gently. — ‘gently’ as an adverb.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 4 My Dear Soldiers

Activity 7.

You will tell your partner something that she/he doesn’t know about you. You may talk about one of the following topics.

  • your pet
  • yourself
  • something you have bought
  • a neighbour
  • a place

While speaking. include two or three lies too. Take turns in speaking. The listener will listen carefully and note down in the notebook what she/he thinks is not true’ or ‘a lie’. When both of you have taken turns in speaking, you will tell your partner what you think was not true in his/her story.

The teacher must go to each bench to ensure that students are using English. Alternatively, the teacher can give two stories with lies which they can read and the partner can point out the lies.

My Pet

I have a pet. It is dog. It is small. But it is very greedy. It can eat one kilo of rice and twelve eggs for a single meal. It eats its rice with a spoon. When I come from outside, it jumps out me and talks to me in English. It scolds me if I reach home late. My father, is very happy with my dog because it helps him in cleaning the house.
Or
A Visit to Simla

I went to Simla for a vacation. It is a very big city. It is a very warm place. I went there on a shop. I did a lot of shopping there. I bought juices from there. I also bought an aeroplane from there and came home on that aeroplane. I keep the aeroplane in my garage and go to my school on my plane everyday.

Learning to Speak (Pairwork)

There are birds of prey that live on high mountains and trees. They have very good eye sight and can see things on the ground while flying in the sky. If they see something that they can eat, they dive like a thunderbolt to catch their prey.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 4 My Dear Soldiers

Activity 8.

Think of a wild animal or a bird that you like. Write its different qualities in the mind map given below. Take 2-3 minutes to do this work. You can use the following hints.
(a) kind of bird or animal
(b) its appearance and size
(c) its habitat
(d) its eating habits – herbivorous/carnivorous
(e) some special quality
(f) usefulness of the animal/bird
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 4 My Dear Soldiers 1

Now speak for two minutes about the animal or the bird you have made notes on. You can refer to your notes while speaking.
Answer:
Elephant is my favourite animal. It lives in dense forests, mostly in dry-wet areas. It is a royal animal that walks gracefully. It has big body greyish to brown in colour. It is a herbivorous. Sugarcane is its favourite food. It has a trunk and two long teeth. It carries heavy logs of wood. It gives rides too.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 4 My Dear Soldiers 2

Learning to Write

Letter Writing

Letter writing is an important skill. We need to write letters in our daily life. It may be stated that these days people write emails more than letters. However, the art of writing letters and emails is the same though the format is different. Let us look at a complete letter written below:

Write a letter to your younger brother congratulating him on his brilliant success.

A 204 Rishi Apartments
Sector 70
SAS Nagar
June 10, 20…
Dear Harnaaz
Heartiest congratulations on achieving brilliant success in your board examination! I just came to know about it and I am very happy. I hope you are also extremely happy to receive the news of your result. You have stood first in your stater It is the result of your hard work. I am really proud of you. Your parents must also be very happy. If you continue to work hard like this, you will be a successful person in life.
I wish you a lot of success in your future too.
Yours sincerely
Mankeerat.

Activity 9

Now, using the format of letter writing given earlier and the notes written by you in the mind map above, write a letter to your friend telling him/her all about the animal/ bird you wrote about. At the end of the letter, you must write to your friend about why human beings should try to protect birds and animals from getting hunted by poachers.
Answer:
C-203, Sardar Patel Marg
Sector–22
Chandigarh
21 May, 20…..
Dear Divyadeep
India is a land of bio-diversity (जैव – विविधता) We have many kinds of birds and animals wild and domestic. They have different colours, sizes and different food habits. They live in different climatic conditions (जलवायु दशाएं). They are the beauty of our planet. Elephant is a royal animal. He has kingly grace. Bengal Tiger is another wild animal worth mentioning. Lion is the king of forest. Killing of these animals for food and profit is banned. But it is a pity that poachers hunt them for money. They don’t spare even innocent birds like peacock. It must be stopped otherwise our earth will become a poor place to live in.
Yours Sincerely
Jasjeet.

Word Meanings

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 4 My Dear Soldiers 3

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 4 My Dear Soldiers

My Dear Soldiers Poem Summary in English

My Dear Soldiers Summary in English

It is a patriotic poem by A.P.J. Abdul Kalam. It is dedicated to the Indian soldiers. They are the great sons of India. Sun or shine they do their duty. They don’t care for hot sun rays or chilly winds. They are awake day and night guarding borders, the sea, the air and marshes.

Our soldiers are true patriots and selfless soldiers. They sacrifice their all for the sake of the country. They die for the sake of their motherland in the prime of their youth. They are worthy of our praise, respect and god’s blessing. Every Indian prays for the glory of our brave soldiers.

My Dear Soldiers Summary in Hindi

यह A.P.J. Abdul Kalam द्वारा लिखी गई देशभक्ति की एक कविता है। यह भारतीय सैनिकों को समर्पित है। वे भारत के महान् सपूत हैं। वे हर मौसम में अपना कर्तव्य निभाते हैं। वे सूर्य की गर्म किरणों या शीतल हवाओं की परवाह नहीं करते। वे हमारी सीमाओं-सागरों, हवाई मार्गों तथा दलदली भूमियों-की रक्षा करते हुए दिन-रात जागते रहते हैं। हमारे सैनिक सच्चे देशभक्त और नि:स्वार्थ सिपाही हैं। वे देश के लिए अपना सब कुछ बलिदान कर देते हैं। वे भरी जवानी में देश के लिए अपने प्राण दे देते हैं। वे हमारी प्रशंसा, हमारे सम्मान और परमात्मा के आशीर्वाद के पात्र हैं। हर भारतीय भारतीय सैनिकों के गौरव के लिए प्रार्थना करता है।

Central Idea of The Poem

This poem sings the glory of our soldiers. They are true patriots who sacrifice their all for the sake of their country. They guard our boundaries day and night. Sun or shine they are alert. Let us pray for their honour and glory.

Class 8 PSEB Solutions Poetry

The Aged Mother Question Answer Class 8 English Solutions Chapter 2 PSEB Solutions

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class English Book Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Class 8th English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother Question Answers

The Aged Mother Class 8 Questions and Answers

Activity 1

Look up the following words in a dictionary. You should seek the following information about the words and put them in your WORDS notebook.

1. Meaning of the word as used in the lesson (adjective/noun/verb. etc.)
2. Pronunciation (The teacher may refer to the dictionary or a mobile phone for correct pronunciation.)
3. Spellings.

despotic suggestive failing prompted barbarous abandoning widowed
humble reckless snapped . hastened blaze abolished frailty

Vocabulary Expansion

Activity 2

Put a tick on the option that brings out the meaning of the underlined word.

1. It was governed by a despotic leader.
(a) A person who expects everyone to obey all his orders.
(b) A person who loves his people.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

2. He had a great dislike for anything suggestive of failing health and strength.
(a) giving an idea of
(b) typical

3. This prompted him to make a cruel law for the province.
(a) encouraged to do something
(b) made a rule

4. Those were barbarous days.
(a) uncivilized
(b) crude

5. The custom of abandoning old people to die was not uncommon.
(a) to leave or desert
(b) to discontinue

6. The narrow road was crossed and re-crossed by many paths made by the hụnters and the woodcutters.
(a) small width
(b) big

7. She stretched forth her hand and snapped the twigs from bushes.
(a) broke
(b) pulled

8. His demand was that his subjects should present him with a rope of ash.
(a) people
(b) studies

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

9. That very hour the cruel law was abolished.
(a) came to an end
(b) destroyed

10. He realised that old age meant experience of life and not frailty.
(a) physical weakness
(b) strength
Answer:
1. (a) A person who expects everyone to obey all his orders
2. (a) giving an idea of
3. (a) encouraged to do something
4. (a) uncivilized
5. (a) to leave or desert
6. (a) small width
7. (a) broke
8. (a) people
9. (a) came to an end
10. (a) physical weakness.

Learning to Read and Comprehend 

Activity 3:

Rearrange the sentences given below in the correct sequence.

Write the numbers in the given brackets. The first one is done for you.
1. The son decided to take his mother back home.
2. A farmer decided to leave his old mother on the top of a mountain.
3. The governor realized his mistake and abolished the law.
4. Once in Shining, a cruel ruler made a law that all the old people must be put to death.
5. Using the idea of his old and experienced mother, the farmer made a rope of ash.
6. When the farmer turned to go back home, the mother advised him to return home with the help of twigs.
7. Filled with fear, he hid his mother in his home.
8. The mother dropped the small twigs as markers on the way to help her son return home safely.
Answer:
1. Once in Shining, a cruel ruler made a law that all the old people must be put to death.
2. A farmer decided to leave his old mother on the top of a mountain.
3. The mother dropped the small twigs as markers on the way to help her son return home safely.
4. When the farmer turned to go back home, the mother advised him to return home with the help of twigs.
5. The son decided to take his mother back home.
6. Filled with fear, he hid his mother in his home.
7. Using the idea of his old and experienced mother, the farmer made a rope of ash.
8. The governor realized his mistake and abolished the law.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

Activity 4.

Answer the following questions in one or two sentences.

Question 1.
What was the cruel announcement made by the despotic leader ?
तानाशाह नेता द्वारा क्या घोषणा की गई ?
Answer:
It was to put all the aged in the province to death.

Question 2.
Why was the farmer sorrowful ?
Answer:
The farmer was sorrowful because he loved his old mother very much. He did not want to leave her.

Question 3.
What things did the farmer carry to the top of the mountain ?
किसान पर्वत की चोटी पर क्या-क्या चीजें ले गया ?
Answer:
The farmer carried some cooked rice and a pot filled with cold water to the top of the mountain.

Question 4.
What made the mother anxious as they climbed up the mountain ?
पहाड़ी पर चढ़ते समय माँ को किस बात ने चिंतित किया?
Answer:
Many paths to the top of the mountain were unknown to the son. This made the mother anxious. She got worried about her son to lose his way on his return.

Question 5.
What did the mother drop along the way?
माँ ने रास्ते के साथ-साथ क्या गिरा दिया ?
Answer:
The mother dropped twigs along the way.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

Question 6.
What was the advice given by the farmer’s mother for the safe return of her son ?
किसान की माँ ने अपने पुत्र की सुरक्षित वापिसी के लिए क्या परामर्श दिया ?
Answer:
She adviced her son to follow the path dotted with piles of twigs.

Question 7.
Where did the farmer hide his mother?
किसान ने अपनी माँ को कहाँ छिपाया ?
Answer:
The farmer hide his mother in a walled closet under their kitchen floor.

Question 8.
When did the Governor realize his mistake ?
गवर्नर को अपनी गलती का अहसास कब हुआ ?
Answer:
The governor realized his mistake when he came to know the truth of real wisdom. He realized that real wisdom comes with a growing age.

Activity 5

Identify the underlined character(s).

1. He gave orders for the aged to be put to death.
2. He considered the order to be the kindest mode of death.
3. She quietly dropped some twigs on the way.
4. Together we will follow the path, together we will die.
5. He listened and meditated in silence.
Answer:
1. The governor of Shining
2. the farmer
3. the farmer’s old mother
4. the farmer and his old mother
5. The governor.

The Determiners

To determine’ means to mark, to fix or to limit. Therefore, a determiner is a word which limits or fixes the meaning of a noun. It is also called a Noun-marker.

‘Determine’ का अर्थ है कुछ निर्धारित करना या सीमित करना। इस तरह Determiner वह शब्द है जो Noun के अर्थ को ‘निश्चित करता है या एक सीमा में बांधता है। इसे Noun-marker भी कहा जाता है।

Examples :
1. He helped his friend.
2. My friend gave me a pen.
In sentence 1. ‘his’ is a determiner. It tells us that ‘he’ helped only ‘his friend and no one else. In sentence

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

2. the word ‘my’ is a determiner.

Note : A determiner limits or fixes only the noun and not any other part of speech.
For example : Veena is a good girl. In this sentence a refers to the noun ‘girl and the adjective ‘good’ makes no difference to the function of a. Kinds of Determiners.
There are five types of determiners :

1. Articles – a, an, the
2. Possessives – my, our, your, his, her, their, its.
3. Numerals – one, two, three, four, first, second, etc.
4. Quantitative – all, any, little, a little, much, some, etc.
5. Demonstratives – this, that, these, those. 1. Articles
There are two types of articles :
1. Indefinite articles – ‘a’, ‘an’
2. Definite article – the
(a) Indefinite articles : ‘A’and ‘an’ are indefinite articles. They are used before a countable common noun in singular number. They are called indefinite articles because they are used with indefinite names.
Examples : a boy, a pencil, an apple, etc.

Use of ‘a’ and ‘an’
1. ‘An’ is generally used with countable common nouns in singular numbers before words beginning with a vowel sound.
For example : an apple, an egg, an MLA, an umbrella, an incident.

2. If a word begins with a silent h, ‘an’ is used before it.
For example : an hour, an honest man.

3. When a word begins with a vowel letter ‘u’ sounding like ‘you’, ‘& is used before ‘it instead of ‘an’.
For example : a university, a union.

4. If a word begins with a vowel letter é sounding like ‘you’, ‘k’ is used instead of ‘an’.
For example : a European.

5. If a vowel gives the sound of ‘w’, ‘a’ is used.
For example : a one-eyed man, a one-rupee coin.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

6. ‘A’ and an’ are used in expressions denoting price, speed, ratio etc.
For example : thirty miles an hour
twenty rupees a day
two of a trade

7. ‘A’ is used in some numerical expressions.
For example :
a great deal, a lot of, a dozen, a hundred

8. ‘A’ is used with few’ and ‘little’.
For example :
I borrowed a few books from him.
A little knowledge is a dangerous thing.

(b) Definite Article :
“The’ is called the definite article because it points out to a definite person or a thing.
1. I met a boy.
2. The boy told me a story.
3. The story was very interesting.
In the first sentence ‘a boy’ means any boy and not a particular person.
In the second sentence, ‘the boy’ refers to a particular person. Similarly, in the second sentence ‘a story’ means any story. But in the third sentence ‘the story’ means a particular story.

Use of ‘the’
“The’ is used to denote a particular person, place or thing.
For example:
1. He is the boy who won the prize.
2. She has gone to the bus stop.
“The’ is used when a person, place or thing has already been mentioned.
For example :
I bought a bicycle. The bicycle cost me ₹5000.
‘The’ is used to denote the whole class or community.
For example : The dog runs fast.

Special ‘use of the’ :
1. Before the names of rivers, mountain ranges, oceans, groups of islands, bays, descriptive names of states and countries :
the Ganges
the Ravi/Beas
the Shivaliks
the Indian Ocean
the Andaman and Nicobar Islands
the Bay of Bengal
the USA

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

2. Before the names of newspapers, magazines, companies, corporations, organizations :
The Tribune
The Hindustan Times
The Life Insurance
The National Book Trust
The Punjab Roadways

3. Before the names of sacred books :
the Ramayana/the Gita
the Guru Granth Sahib
the Quran
the Vedas
the Bible

4. Before musical instruments :
the sitar
the veena

5. Before the names of unique things :
the sun the moon
the stars

6. Before adjectives in superlative degree :
He is the best doctor of the college.
Mumbai is the biggest city in India.

7. Before adjectives used as nouns :
the sick
the poor

8. As part of the phrase made of the comparative degrees :
The higher we go, the colder it gets.

9. When a family name is used to refer to the whole family:
The Malhotras are a happy family.

The position of the Article
Generally the article is placed before the noun it refers to. But when an adjective or an adverb appears before a noun, the article comes before the adjective or the adverb.
For example :
She is a teacher. (before a noun)
She is a good teacher. (before an adjective)
She is a very good player. (before an adverb)
But when the adjective is preceded by “as,’ ‘so’, ‘too’ and ‘how’, the article is used between :the noun and the adjective.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

For example:
so beautiful a house
too hot a day
When the noun is preceeded by ‘such’, both’ and ‘all, the article is placed after them.

For example :
I have not seen such a fool.
Both the brothers were present.
All the boys had left.

2. Possessives
(सम्बन्धवाचक शब्द) my, her, your,his, its, our, their सम्बन्धवाचक सर्वनाम है और इनका प्रयोग एक वचन और बहुवचन दोनों प्रकार को संज्ञाओं के साथ किया जाता है जैसे
These determiners are possessive forms of personal pronouns. They can be used both before singular and plural nouns.
For example :
1 I do not lend my books to anyone.
2. We love our teacher.
3. One should do one’s duty.
4. My mother is a doctor.

3. Numerals
Numerals are words that relate to numbers. There are three types of numerals :
Definite Numerals : They refer to a definite or exact number.
The definite numerals are further divided into two kinds:
a. Cardinals : one, two, three, five, etc.
These words can be used before nouns which are countable :
1. Please bring one pen for me.
2. He gave him ten coins.

b. Ordinals : first, second, third, etc.
These words are used to indicate order:
1. The first book was very boring.
2.He was the last man to come.

Indefinite Numerals : They refer to vague or indefinite number such as “many’, ‘few’;’a . few’, ‘the few’, ‘several, ‘all’, etc.
1. I have many things to do.
2. Several people witnessed the accident.
3. He has few friends in the city. (almost none)
4. He does have a few friends in the city. (a small number)
5. The few friends he has are loyal to him. (whatever small number)

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

Distributive Numerals :
These words refer to each of a group, such as ‘each’, ‘every’, “either’, ‘neither’ etc.
1. Each of us must do so.
2. Each of the boys must do his duty.
3. Either Gurpreet or Harpreet has won the prize.

4. Quantitatives
Words like some’, ‘any’, ‘little’, ‘much etc. are determiners of quantity.
(a) Some and Any: ‘Some’ has positive implications and any’ has negative implications. · Questions with negative implications also take any’. But questions with positive
implications take ‘some’.

Examples :
1. I want some milk. Is there any milk in the house ?
2. I spent some holidays with my uncle.
3. There is hardly any milk.
4. Did you hear any noise ?
5. Do you want books ? We have some very good books.
6. I don’t have any money with me.
7. I have hardly any money.
8. There was hardly any boy in the school.
9. I can lend you some money.

(b) Much : ‘Much’ is used to denote quantity.
He has much money.
Don’t think about it too much.

(c) Little, a little, the little : ‘Little’ has a negative implication. It means ‘hardly any’. A little means ‘some’. “The little means whatever little exists, but the whole of it.
I want to have some water. But there is little water in the pitcher.
However, there is a little in the bucket.
I have drunk the little water the jug had.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

5. Demonstratives
This’, ‘that’, ‘these and those are called Demonstrative determiners. They point out the object denoted by the nouns that follow them. “This and that are singular; ‘these and ‘those are plural. They show which person, place or thing is being talked about.

For example :
1. This book is mine and that is yours.
2. These men are hardworking.
3. Those girls sing very well.

Activity 6

Fill in the blanks with suitable determiners.

1. I went to …………….. window which commanded a large green garden.
2. I have …………………. work to do…
3. Lookout of the window for ………………… minute.
4. …………… shirt is costly but ……………….. shirt is cheap.
5. ………………….. books she had were all lost.
6. ………………… pen costs two rupees.
7. But I had …………………. idea of all this.
8. He didn’t make . …………….. mistakes in the essay.
9. I borrowed ……………….. books from him.
10. It educates both ……………….. blind and the helpers.
11. We should look into ………………….. depth of the problem.
12. It was ………………….. daring idea.
13. ………………….. boys attended the class.
14. This is …………….. good home for him.
15. ………………… teachers were asked to be present on Sunday.
16. …………………. sum cannot be solved by ……….. silly boys.
17. Besides them stood Pasteur, holding a narrow tube in … ………… hand.
18. They took samples from ………………. brain of a dog that had died.
19. ………….. little knowledge is …………….. dangerous thing.
20. He takes ……………… interest in me.
Answer:
1. the
2. much
3. a
4. this, that/ my, your
5. The
6. My
7. no
8. any
9. some
10. the
11. the
12. a
13. only, A few
14. a
15. only
16. This, the,
17. his
18. the
19. A, a
20. no.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

Activity 7 :

Rewrite the following sentences after correcting them by adding/deleting a word wherever necessary in each sentence :

Question 1.
Only few men are honest.
Answer:
Only a few men are honest.

Question 2.
The man is mortal.
Answer:
Man is mortal.

Question 3.
He acted like man.
Answer:
He acted like a man.

Question 4.
Beas flows in Punjab.
Answer:
The Beas flows in the Punjab.

Question 5.
You are in wrong but he is in right.
Answer:
You are in the wrong but he is in the right.

Question 6.
He is by far ablest boy.
Answer:
He is by far the ablest boy.

Question 7.
Nobody likes a person with bad temper.
Answer:
Nobody likes a person with a bad temper.

Question 8.
The iron is useful metal.
Answer:
Iron is a useful metal.

Question 9.
Not word was said.
Answer:
Not a word was said.

Question 10.
He has too high a opinion of you.
Answer:
He has too high an opinion of you.

Question 11.
Learn this poem by the heart.
Answer:
I learn this poem by heart.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

Question 12.
Never tell lie.
Answer:
Never tell a lie.

Leaning to Listen

Activity 8.

Listen to your teacher carefully. She/he will tell you a story. Write the story in the given space as you hear it. Listen carefully to the pauses and tone and use appropriate punctuation marks.
Answer:
The Lion and the Boar
It was a hot summer day. A lion and a boar reached a small water body for a drink. They began arguing and fighting about who would drink first. After a while they were tired and stopped for breath, when they noticed vultures above. Some. they realized that the vultures are waiting for one or both of them to fall, to feast on them. The lion and the boar then decided that it were best to make up and be friends than fight and become food for vultures. They drank the water together and went their own ways.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

Learning to Speak
Role Play

Making Telephone Calls in Emergency
There are special emergency numbers that you can dial in an emergency. For example, to call the police you need to dial 100 from your phone. Other emergency calls could be made to the ambulance service, fire station, trauma centres, etc. When making such calls, we must give quick and adequate information. Our address or location and our contact details are most important. We must also be able to tell them the reason for our call i.e. what kind of emergency we are dealing with.

Look at the following conversation for proper understanding :

Police station : Hello, this is Mullanpur Police Station.
You : Hello, there is a hit and run case. A boy is lying injured on the road.
Police station : Please give us your location details.
You : I am standing near the main office of Omaxe Township. I will send you my mobile location.
Police station : That will be very helpful!
You : Can you also call an ambulance please ? He needs immediate medical attention.

Activity 9.

Create a dialogue between yourself and the Fire station informing them about the fire near your house. Once you have written the dialogue in your notebooks, practise it with your partner. You must take turn to play both roles.
Answer:

I : Hurry up ! There is a big fire in Sector 11.
Fire station : What is the location ?
I : It is just behind the Rose Model School Building.
Fire station : Worry not! The Fire Brigade reaches within five minutes.
I : How can we help you?
Fire station : Look ! Try to keep the traffic away from the road.

Story Writting

Activity 10

Write a short story. You may use some of the following words and phrases :

  • felt scared
  • heard the sound in the cupboard
  • thought it must be a thief
  • might be a killer
  • lay still
  • could hardly breathe
  • felt someone touched my foot
  • shouted with fear
  • parents came and switched on light
  • saw a rat

Begin your story with :
Suddenly, I woke up. It was very dark. I felt there was someone in my room. I tried to guess who it could be. It might be a thief. It could be a killer. I got scared and lay still. I could hardly breathe, out of fear. I felt someone touching my foot. I shouted loudly. At that very moment, my parents came and switched on the light. We all burst into laughter when we saw a rat close to my bed.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

Learning to Use the language (Grop Work)

Activity 11

Suppose your classroom has been attacked by a swarm of bees. It is time to go back home. Get into groups of five and think of how you will take your bags from the classroom full of bees. You will get 5 minutes to discuss.
Answer:
When you have finished discussing, your chosen group leader will present your ideas in front of the class. The teacher will observe and discuss good, practical and impractical points.
Group leader : We are going to cover our body with blankets, lying in the emergency room. We will produce smoke by burning a rags. It will make the bees fly away. We will quickly pick up our bags and come out of the room.
Teacher : This method may work successfully. But some bees may not fly away. You must: keep this point in mind.

Comprehension of passage

Read the following passages and answer the questions given below each :

(1) Long, long ago there was a province in Japan called Shining. It was governed by a despotic leader. He was a good warrior but he had a great dislike for anything suggestive of failing health and strength. This prompted him to make a cruel law for the province. The entire province was given strict orders to immediately put all the aged people to death. Those were barbarous days and the custom of abandoning old people to die was not uncommon.

In the same province lived a poor farmer and his aged widowed mother at the foot of the mountain. They owned a bit of land which supplied them with food. They were humble, peaceful and happy. The poor farmer loved his aged mother and dealt with her very tenderly. The order by the despot filled his heart with sorrow. Other people did not think twice about obeying the order of the governor but this farmer was very unhappy. However, he had to obey the order so the farmer prepared for what at that time was considered the kindest way of death.

1. What prompted him to make a cruel law ?
उसे किस बात ने क्रूर कानून बनाने के लिए प्रोत्साहित किया ?

2. What was the order given to the people ?
लोगों को क्या आदेश दिया गया

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) The order by the despot filled the heart of the farmer with delight.
(b) The mother and the son were humble and peaceful.

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) The custom of abandoning old people to die was …….
(b) They owned a bit of land which …
Or
Match the words with their meaning :

(i) entire whole
(ii) barbarous beautiful
cruel

Answer:
1. He disliked failing health and strength. This prompted him to make a cruel law.
2. The people were ordered to put all the aged people to death immediately.
3. (a) False, (b) True.
4. (a) The custom of abandoning old people to die was not uncommon.
(b) They owned a bit of land which supplied them with food.
Or
(i) entire — whole
(ii) barbarous — cruel.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

(2) Just at sunset, when his day’s work ended, he took some unwhitened rice which was the main food for the poor and cooked it, dried it and tied it in a cloth which he swung in a bundle around his neck along with a pot filled with cool water. Then he lifted his helpless old mother on his back and started on his painful journey up the mountain. The road was long and steep. The narrow road was crossed and re-crossed by many paths made by the hunters and the woodcutters. At some places, they got lost and confused but he did not think about it. He was about to abandon his dear mother so it did not matter. which path he took to reach the mountain top. On he went, climbing blindly upward-ever upward towards the high bare summit known as Obatsuyama, the mountain where the aged were abandoned.

1. Where did he take his old mother?
2. Why was the journey painful ?
3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) The name of the high bare summit was Shining.
(b) Unpolished rice was the main food for the people.
4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) In this bundle, along with rice there was a pot ……..
(b) The summit where …………… was known as obatsuyama.
Or. Write the meaning of the following words in English : (Any two)
helpless, summit, puzzled.
Answer:
1. He took his old mother to the top of a mountain.
2. The journey was painful because it lay through a mountain. The road was long and steep. Beside, the son was carrying his helpless old mother on his back.
3. (a) False
(b) True.
4. (a) In the bundle, along with rice, there was a pot filled with cool water.
(b) The summit where the aged were abandoned was known as obatsuyama.
Or
poor, top, confused.

(3) The eyes of the old mother were not so dim that they could not notice the reckless hastening from one path to another and her loving heart grew anxious. Her son did not know many paths of the mountain and his return might be dangerous so she stretched forth her hand and snapped twigs from bushes as they passed. She quietly dropped a handful every few steps of the way so that as they climbed, the narrow path behind them was dotted with tiny piles of twigs. At last, the summit was reached. Weary and heartsick, the youth gently released his burden and silently prepared a place of comfort as his last duty to the loved one. Gathering fallen pine needles, he made a soft cushion and tenderly lifted his old mother onto it. He wrapped her padded coat more closely about her stooping shoulders and with tearful eyes and an aching heart, he had farewell to his mother.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

1. Why did the old mother grow anxious ?
वृद्ध मोँ चिंता में क्यों पड़ गई
2. Why did he prepare a place of comfort ?
उसने आरामदायक स्थान क्यों तैयार किया ?
3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) The summit was reached easily.
(b) He had farewell to his mother with tearful eyes.
4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Gathering fallen pine needles, he made a
(b) The narrow path behind them was dotted with …
Or
Match the words with their meaning :

(i) Weary softly and slowly
(ii) tenderly heavy
tired

Answer:
1. The old mother grew anxious because her son did not know many paths of mountain. So his return might be dangerous.
2. He prepared a place of comfort for his old mother. It was a symbol of his last duty to his loved mother.
3. (a) False
(b) True.
4. (a) Gathering fallen pine needles, he made a soft cushion.
(b) The narrow path behind them was dotted with tiny piles of twigs.
Or
tired
(i) Weary — tired
(ii) Tenderly — softly and slowly.

(4) The entire province of Shining trembled with fear. The order had to be obeyed but how could any one make a rope of ash ? One night, in great distress, the son whispered the news to his hidden’ mother. “Wait”, she said, “Let me think … Let me think”. On the second day, she told him what to do, “Make a rope of twisted straw.” she said. “Then stretch it upon a row of flat stones and burn it on a windless night.” He called the people together and did as she had said. When the blaze died down, there upon the stones, with every twist and fiber showing perfectly, lay a rope of ash.

The governor was pleased at the wit of the youth and praised greatly but he demanded to know where he had obtained his wisdom from. “Alas! Alas!” cried the farmer, “the truth must be told!” and with deep bows, he narrated his story. The governor listened and then meditated is silence. Finally, he lifted his head. “Shining needs more than the strength of youth,” he said gravely. “Ah, how could I have forgotten the well-known saying, “With the crown of snow, there cometh wisdom !” That very hour, the cruel law was abolished as he realised that old age means experience of life and not frailty.

1. What was the order given to the people of Shining ?
Shining के लोगों को क्या आदेश दिया गया था?
2. Who made the rope and how ?
रस्सी किसने बनाई और कैसे ?
3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) The entire province of Shining jumped with joy.
(b) “With the crown of snow, there cometh wisdom” is a well-known saying.
4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Shining needs more than the …………..
(b) That very hour, the cruel law …………….
Or Write the meanings of the following words in English : (Any two) wit, meditated, gravely.
Answer.
1. The people of Shining given the order of making a rope of ash.
2. The young farmer made the rope. He made it by burning some twisted straw on a windless night.
3. (a) False
(b) True.
4. (a) Shining needs more than the strength of youth.
(b) That very hour, the cruel law was abolished.
Or wit—wisdom, meditated—thought over something deeply, gravely—-seriously.

Use Of Words And Phrases in Sentences

1. Warrior – Arjuna was a great warrior.
2. Abolish – The British government abolished the salt law.
3. Prompt – His cruel nature prompted him to tease the poor beggar.
4. Humble – My father is very humble at heart.
5. Peaceful – The villagers are very peaceful.
6. Boast of – Never boast of your wealth.
7. Summit – The Himalayas have many high summits.
8. Distress – He is in great distress these days.
9. Pleased at – I am pleased at his honesty.
10. Blaze – The sudden blaze almost blinded him.

Word Meaning

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother 1

The Aged Mother Summary in Hindi

Long, long ago …………………… aged were abandoned.

बहुत समय पहले जापान में शीनिंग (Shining) नामक एक प्रांत था। वहाँ पर एक निरंकुश नेता का शासन था। वह एक अच्छा योद्धा था परन्तु उसे गिरते स्वास्थ्य और ताकत के बारे में कोई भी बात अच्छी नहीं लगती थी। इस बात ने उसे प्रांत के लिए एक क्रूर कानून बनाने के लिए उकसाया। पूरे प्रांत में सभी वृद्धों को तुरन्त मार डालने के सख्त आदेश जारी कर दिए गए। ये बर्बरता के दिन थे और वृद्ध लोगों को मरने के लिए छोड़ देना कोई असामान्य बात नहीं थी। . इसी प्रांत में पहाड़ी के तल पर एक ग़रीब किसान अपनी बूढ़ी विधवा माँ के साथ रहता था। उनके पास भूमि का एक छोटा सा टुकड़ा था जिससे वे जीवनयापन करते थे।

वे विनम्र, शांतिप्रिय तथा खुश थे। गरीब किसान अपनी वृद्ध माँ को बहुत प्यार करता था और वह उसके साथ बहुत ही नम्रतापूर्वक व्यवहार करता था। तानाशाह के आदेश से उसका मन दु:खी हो गया। अन्य लोगों ने शासक के आदेश का पालन करने पर एक बार भी पुनः विचार नहीं किया। परन्तु किसान बहुत ही अप्रसन्न था। फिर भी उसे आदेश का पालन करना था इसलिए किसान ने वह तरीका अपनाने की तैयारी कर ली जो उस काल में मृत्यु का सबसे दयापूर्ण तरीका माना जाता था।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 2 The Aged Mother

शाम के समय जब दिनभर का कार्य समाप्त हो गया, उसने कुछ कच्चे चावल जो गरीबों का मुख्य भोजन था लिये और उन्हें पकाया। उसने चावलों को सुखाकर एक कपड़े में इनकी गठरी बना कर उसने इन्हें अपने गले में लटका लिया। उसने ठण्डे पानी से भरा एक, बर्तन भी उनके साथ लटका लिया। तब उसने अपनी लाचार बूढ़ी माँ को अपनी पीठ पर उठा लिया और पहाड़ी पर अपनी कष्टभरी यात्रा के लिए चल पड़ा। सड़क लम्बी और सीधी खड़ी थी। संकरी सड़क को जगह-जगह पर शिकारियों और लकड़हारों द्वारा बनाए गए रास्ते काटते रहे।

कुछ स्थानों पर वे उलझ गए और भटक गए परन्तु उसने इस बारे में नहीं सोचा। उसे तो अपनी प्रिय माँ को त्यागना था, इसलिए इस बात का कोई महत्त्व नहीं था कि वह किस रास्ते से पहाड़ की चोटी पर पहुँचे। वह अन्धा-धुंध ऊपर की ओर चढ़ता गया और अधिक ऊपर उस वनस्पति हीन शिखर की ओर जो Obatsuyama के नाम से जाना जाता था। यह वह पर्वत था जहाँ वृद्धों को त्यागा (छोड़ा) जाता था। .

The eyes of the old……….. we will die !”

वृद्ध माँ की आँखें इतनी धुंधली नहीं हुईं थीं कि वे लापरवाही से एक मार्ग से दूसरे मार्ग पर जाते हुए कदमों को न भांप सकें। उसका प्रेम भरा मन चिंतित हो उठा। उसके पुत्र को पर्वत के बहुत से मार्गों की जानकारी नहीं थी और इससे उसकी वापसी खतरनाक हो सकती थी। इसलिए आगे बढ़ते हुए उसने अपने हाथों को फैला लिया और झाड़ियों की टहनियां तोड़ती गई। वह ऊपर चढ़ते हुए थोड़ी-थोड़ी दूरी पर चुपचाप मुट्ठी भर गिराती रही। उनके पीछे के संकरे मार्ग पर टहनियों के छोटे-छोटे ढेर लग गए थे।

अंत में वे शिखर पर पहुँच गए। थके हुए और मायूस नवयुवक ने धीरे से अपने बोझ को उतारा और चुपचाप अपने अंतिम कर्त्तव्य के लिए आराम भरे एक स्थान को तैयार करने लगा। उसने चीड़ के पेड़ की नुकीली पत्तियों को इकट्ठा करके एक मुलायम गद्दी बनाई और अपनी वृद्ध माता को उस पर बिठा दिया। उसने उसके नर्म कोट को उसके झुके कंधों के और अधिक निकट तक कर दिया और रोते हुए तथा दुःखी मन से अपनी माता से अलविदा कहा।

उसकी माँ ने कांपती आवाज़ तथा नि:स्वार्थ प्यार से उसे अंतिम निर्देश दिए। उसने कहा, “पुत्र अपनी आँखें बंद न होने देना । पर्वत का रास्ता खतरों से भरा हुआ है। ध्यानपूर्वक देखना और उस मार्ग पर चलना जहाँ तुम्हें टहनियों के ढेर दिखें। वे तुम्हें और नीचे जाने के परिचित मार्ग पर ले जाएंगे।” पुत्र ने हैरानी भरी नज़रों से पीछे मार्ग की ओर देखा और फिर अपनी लाचार वृद्ध माँ के थके-हारे हाथों को देखा जिनमें उसके प्यार भरे कार्य के कारण खरोंचें आई हुई थीं और जो मैले हो गए थे।

गवर्नर नवयुवक की बुद्धिमता पर खुश था और उसने उसकी भरपूर प्रशंसा की। परन्तु उसने यह जानने की माँग रखी कि उसने यह बुद्धिमता कहाँ से प्राप्त की। किसान चिल्लाया, “अरे मर गए !’ सच्चाई तो बतानी पड़ेगी !” पूरी तरह झुकते हुए उसने सारी कहानी कह सुनाई। शासक ने सुना और फिर खामोश होकर सोचने लगा। अंततः उसने अपना सिर उठाया। उसने गंभीरता से कहा, “शीनिंग (Shining) को नवयुवकों की ताकत से ज्यादा कुछ और चाहिए।”आह, मैं इतनी प्रसिद्ध कहावत कैसे भूल गया कि बुद्धिमता सफ़ेद बालों (उम्र) के साथ आती है।” उसी क्षण उसने क्रूर कानून को समाप्त कर दिया। उसे आभास हो गया कि बुढ़ापा जीवन का अनुभव है न कि निर्बलता।

Retranslation From English to Hindi

वहां पर एक निरंकुश नेता का शासन था। उनके पास भूमि का एक छोटा सा टुकड़ा था जिससे वे जीवनयापन करते थे। वे विनम्र, शांतिप्रिय तथा खुश थे।

1. It was governed by a deposite leader. —- वहां पर एक निरंकुश नेता का शासन था।
2. They owned a bit of land which supplied them with food. —- उनके पास भूमि का एक छोटा सा टुकड़ा था जिससे वे जीवनयापन करते थे।
3. They were humble, peaceful and happy. —- वे विनम्र, शांतिप्रिय तथा खुश थे।
4. The poor farmer loved his aged mother. —- ग़रीब किसान अपनी वृद्ध माँ से बहुत प्यार करता था।
5. However, he had to obey the order. —- फिर भी उसे आदेश का पालन करना था।
6. The road was long and steep. —- सड़क लम्बी और सीधी खड़ी थी।
7. They got lost and confused. —- वे उलझ गए और भटक गए।
8. He was about to abandon his dear mother. —- वह अपनी प्रिय माँ को त्यागने ही वाला था।
9. Her son did not know many paths of mountain.—- उसके पुत्र को पर्वत के बहुत से मार्गों की जानकारी नहीं थी।
10. The youth gently released his burden. —- नवयुवक ने धीरे से अपना बोझ उतारा
11. He wrapped her padded coat more closely. —- उसने उसके नर्म कोट को और अधिक निकट तक कर दिया।
12. The mountain road is full of dangers. —- पर्वत का रास्ता खतरों से भरा हुआ है।
13. The son hid his mother. —- पुत्र ने अपनी माँ को छिपा लिया।
14. The governor was pleased at the wit the youth. —- गवर्नर नवयुवक की बुद्धिमता पर खुश था।
15. Finally, he lifted his head. —- अंतत: उसने अपना सिर उठाया।
16. The cruel law was abolished.—- क्रूर कानून को समाप्त कर दिया गया।

English Guide for Class 8 PSEB Prose

We Who Love Books Question Answer Class 8 English Solutions Poem Chapter 3 PSEB Solutions

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class English Book Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Class 8th English Solutions Poem Chapter 3 We Who Love Books Question Answers

We Who Love Books Class 8 Questions and Answers

Learning New Words

Activity 1.

Look up the following words in a dictionary. You should seek the following information about the words and put them in your WORDS notebook.

1. Meaning of the word as used in the poem (adjective/noun/verb. etc.)
2. Pronunciation (The teacher may refer to the dictionary or a mobile phone for correct pronunciation.)
3. Spellings. familiar timeless.

familiar timeless refrain
verse companions nourish

Activity 2.

Pick up the rhyming words from the poem and make a list.
Answer:
(a) away — stay
(b) down — gone
(c) again — refrain
(d) me — be/free

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

Activity 3.

Match the words with their correct synonyms.

S.No. Word Synonym
1. moment nutrition
2. modern high
3. clever time
4. upset intelligent
5. nourishment new
6. wealthy lift
7. garbage big
8. infant story
9. tall old
10. large unhappy
11. companion bowl
12. secure friend
13. thief known
14. dish trash
15. ancient burglar
16. timeless rich
17. familiar safe
18.  raise permanent
19. tale baby
20. joy happiness

Answer:
1. moment – time
2. modren – new
3. clever – intelligent
4. upset – unhappy
5. nourishment – nutrition
6. wealthy – rich
7. garbage – trash
8. infant – baby
9. tall – high
10. large – big
11. companion – friend
12. secure – safe
13. thief – burglar
14. dish – bowl
15. ancient – old
16. timeless – permanent
17. familiar – known
18. raise – lift
19. tale – story
20. joy – happiness.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

Learning to Read and Comprehend

Activity 4.

Read the following stanzas and answer the questions.

A. Some books I’ll never give away.
Though old and worn, their binding torn,
Upon my shelves they’ll always stay,
Alive, still read, still fresh each dawn,
Their magic moments never gone.

(a) Name the poem and the poet.
Answer:
The name of the poem is ‘We Who Love Books and that of the poet is Ruskin Bond.

(b) The poet doesn’t want to part with some books. Where does he keep them?
Answer:
The poet keeps them on his shelves.

(c) What is the condition of the books ?
Answer:
They are old and worn. Their binding is torn.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

B. Familiar friends, these timeless tales
Have been with me since I was ten,
And as I turn their pages once again
I feel and love their old refrain.

(a) The poet calls his books ‘familiar friends”. Why does he call them ‘familiar’ ?
Answer:
The poet calls his books ‘familiar friends’ because they have been his friends since he was ten.

(b) What do you understand by the phrase ‘timeless tales’ ?
Answer:
‘Timeless tales’ means untouched by time. They are as fresh today as they  were years ago.

(c) How does the poet feel when he touches and feels the pages of his books ?
Answer:
The poet’s love for their old refrains.

C. Great verse, great thoughts, still stand the test
Of time that’s passing by so fast.
These good companions never fail
To give me joy, to nourish me.
We who love books will always be
The lucky ones’ our minds set free.

(a) According to the poet, what still stand the test of time ?
Answer:
According to the poet great verse and great thoughts still stand the test of time.

(b) What do you think the poet will always get from his good companions ?
Answer:
The poet will always get joy and nourishment from his good friends.

(c) Who according to the poet will always be the lucky ones ?
Answer:
According to the poet, those who love books will always be lucky ones.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

Activity 5.
Books have been described using many names and adjectives. In the given table, list all the names and adjectives used by the poet to describe books.
Answer:

Nouns used for books Adjectives used for describing books
binding some
friends old
tales worn
refrains torn
verse fresh, alive, familiar
companions timeless, great, good

Learning Language

Tenses Tense is the form of a verb used to show the time of an action or a state. The three main tenses are :

  • the Present tense
  • the Past tense
  • the Future tense

Look at the following sentences :

1. I go to school everyday.
2. I went to school yesterday.
3. I shall go to school tomorrow.

  • In sentence 1, the verb ‘go’ refers to the present time and is therefore said to be in the present tense.
  • In sentence 2, the verb ‘went’ refers to an action that happened in the past time and is therefore said to be in the past tense.
  • In sentence 3, the word ‘shall go’ refers to the future time and is therefore said to be in the future tense.

1. Present Tense
Read the following sentences.

  • I help my mother every day.
  • I am helping my mother.
  • I have helped my mother.
  • I have been helping my mother since morning.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

All the four sentences above refer to the present time and therefore are all in the Present Tense. But there is a distinction in the ways in which the action is taking place.

In Sentence 1, the action is mentioned simply. There is no reference to the completeness or incompleteness of the action. The verb ‘help’ is therefore said to be in the Simple Present Tense or the Present Indefinite Tense.

In Sentence 2, the action mentioned is incomplete. It is still going on. The verb ‘am helping’ is said to be in the Present Continuous Tense.

In Sentence 3, the action is mentioned as finished, complete or perfect. The verb ‘have helped’ is said to be in the Present Perfect Tense.

In Sentence 4, the action is mentioned as having been going on continuously but not completed at the present moment.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

The verb ‘have been helping’ is said to be in the Present Perfect Continuous tense. So, the present tense has four forms :

  • Simple Present, or Present Indefinite
  • Present Continuous or Present Progressive
  • Present Perfect
  • Present Perfect Continuous

2. Past Tense
Just as the present tense has four forms, the past tense also has the following four forms :

1. I helped my mother yesterday. (Simple Past or Past Indefinite)
2. I was helping my mother. (Past Continuous or Past Progressive)
3. I had helped my mother. (Past Perfect)
4. I had been helping my mother. (Past Perfect Continuous)

3. Future Tense
Similarly, the future tense has the following four forms :

1. I shall call. (Simple Future or Future Indefinite)
2. I shall be calling. (Future Continuous or Future Progressive)
3. I shall have called. (Future Perfect)
4. I shall have been calling. (Future Perfect Continuous)

Look at the following chart for understanding forms of Tenses :

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books 1

Continuous Present Indefinite (Simple Present)

1. to express what is actually taking place now, for example :

  • Here comes the bride.
  • There goes the bus.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

2. to express a habitual action, for example :

  • He gets up early in the morning.
  • He takes exercise everyday.
  • I go to school by bus.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books 2

3. to express some universal truth, for example :

  • The earth moves round the sun.
  • The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.
  • The soul is immortal.

4. to express a situation or a fact that is permanent, for example :

  • My house faces the east.
  • This road runs from Ludhiana to Delhi.

5. to express a future action, when the futurity is indicated by them, for example :

  • The college reopens next week.
  • We leave by the 8.30 a.m. train.

Look at the tables below to understand how the present tense works.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books 3
Answer:
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books 5

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

When we talk about singular subjects, we add-s/es to the verb. For example ‘he’, ‘she’ ‘iť and other singular subjects such as ‘this toy’, ‘the table etc.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books 4
Answer:
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books 6

More examples :
(a) He drives to work.
(b) She works in an office.
(c) The bank opens at 9:00 a.m.
We do not use ‘be’ verb with the main verb in the simple present tense.
For example :
He works at a bank. (Correct)
He is work at a bank. (Incorrect)

Activity 6.

Underline the correct form of the verb to complete each sentence.
1. Priya love/loves her work.
2. He study/studies agriculture.
3. A salesperson sell/sells products for a company.
4. Sunita work/works in a bank.
5. Nurses help/helps people.
6. We write/writes English books.
7. Your office close/closes at 5:00 p.m.
8. She teach/teaches in a school.
9. I walk/walks to work everyday.
10. I start/starts work at 8:00 a.m. every morning.
Answer:
1. loves
2. studies
3. sells
4. works
5. help
6. write
7. closes
8. teaches
9. walk
10. start.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

Present Continuous

It is used to express an action going on at the time of speaking. It is often associated with adverbs and adverb phrases, of present time, such as ‘now’, ‘at present, ‘at this moment’, etc.
For example :

  • What are you doing now?
  • Mohan is singing a song now.

This tense is sometimes used to mark an action that will happen in the future. For example :

  • We are leaving for London tomorrow.
  • She’s coming to meet me next week.

Activity 7.

Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verb, Present Continuous or Present Simple.

1. I ……………… (not/belong) to Delhi.
2. Hurry! The bus …………….. (come).
3. Seema is a vegetarian. She ……………. (not/eat) meat
4. I ……………. (look) for a maid.
5. Jayati ……………. (eat) oranges.
6. At the moment, we ……………. (make) a video of the party.
7. I ……………… (know) what Mr Sharma wants to buy.
8. I …………….. (apply) for a job in a school but I don’t know if I will be successful.
9. Vanita ……………. (do) some research in the library.
10. She always ……………… (remember) my birthday.
11. Mr Brown …………… (work) in a supermarket.
12. Look! It ……………. (snow).
13. Do you …………… (know) Helen?
14. Look! That woman ……………. (try) to steal that man’s wallet.
15. The Ganges ……………. (flow) into the Bay of Bengal.
Answer:
1. do not belong
2. is coming
3. does not eat
4. am looking
5. eats
6. are making
7. know
8. am applying
9. is doing
10. remembers
11. works
12. is snowing
13. know
14. is trying
15. flows.

Present Perfect

This tense is used :

1. to express an action that has just been completed, for example :

  • The sun has set.
  • We have just arrived.

2. to express a past action the results of which still continue, for example:

  • I have lived in Mumbai for ten years. (the speaker is still living in Mumbai)
  • We have known each other for the past two years.

3. to express a Future Perfect when such words as ‘when’, ‘before’, ‘as soon as’, ’till, ‘after are used before it, for example :

  • I shall go there after I have done my work. (as soon as I finish my work)

Present Perfect Continuous

It shows the action that began in the past and is continuing up to the present time, for example :

  • I have been standing here for two hours.
  • It has been raining since morning.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

Note : In the Present Perfect Continuous tense, ‘since’ and ‘for are used to indicate point of time and period of time respectively, for example :

  • We have been living here since 1955.
  • Meena has been dancing since morning.
  • The girls have been playing for three hours.
  • It has been snowing for two hours.

Activity 8.

Fill in the blanks with the Present Perfect or Present Perfect Continuous forms of the verbs given in the brackets.

(a) Someone …………… the window. (break).
(b) Reeta …………….. her pen. (lose)
(c) We ……………. many medals. (win)
(d) I …………… for a house for two months. (search)
(e) The train ………….. just …………… at the platform. (arrive)
(f) ……………. he …………….. a beard ? (grow)
(g) …………….. you …………….. the Gita ? (read)
(h) I …………….. my uncle for months. (not visit)
(i) She …………….. to Paris twice. (be)
(j) We ……………. already …………. Our breakfast. (have)
Answer:
(a) has broken
(b) has lost
(c) have won
(d) have been searching
(e) has arrived
(f) Has, grown
(g) Have, read
(h) have not visited
(i) has been
(j) have, had.

Learning to Listen (Pairwork)

Activity 9.

Your teacher will tell you a story. Listen to it carefully and fill in the blanks with the words from the story. For the last paragraph, you will write all the words. The teacher will read the passage twice and the last part of the story will be read three times. Once upon a time, there was a shepherd who bought a …………. of sheep. He also had ……… who helped him to …………… his sheep. When the sheep grew up a little, the ………4…. realised that these sheep just …………….. not stop bleating. All day long, the sheep bleated-”Baaah baaah.” What a deafening sound they made; and they just ignored the ……………. commands. He used all the ……………. he could to get the sheep to listen to him and to his dog, but the …………….. didn’t care. Finally, seeing as the sheep wouldn’t stop …………….. the shepherd decided to at least have some ……10……. with it. He bought an enormous ear and transported it out to his fields on the ……..11….. of his wagon.
Answer:
1. flock
2. dog
3. control
4. shepherd
5. would
6. shepherd’s
7. means
8. sheep
9. bleating
10. fun
11. back

Learning to Speak (Pairwork)

Activity 10.

Take a currency note of any value. Describe the currency note to your partner. You must talk about various things that are there on the note and their colour, size, number, location
(where on the note) etc.
Answer:
Your partner will write/draw all the items that you describe on the currency note. You will take turns in describing. The teacher will look at the notes made by your partner to check whether the description matches with the drawing/writing.

Currency Note : ₹500

  • Issued By : Reserve Bank of India
  • Guaranteed by : The Central Government
  • Colour : Stone grey
  • Number : 3 NC 7…… 7
  • Size : 63 mm x 150 mm
  • Shape : Rectangular

Special feature (Design Elements)

  • Picture of Mahatma Gandhi
  • Picture of Red Fort (Historical Building)
  • Picture of National Emblem
  • Symbol of Swachh Bharat

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

Learning to write (Pairwork)

Activity 11.

Look at the picture below. The pictures are in a sequence. Work together and write a short story based on the pictures.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books 10
It was winter. The days were snowy. There was a thick sheet of snow on the earth. Trees was bare. Birds got no shelter, no food. Little Minni and her father came to their help. They took some cardboard and gum. They made a small hut for the birds. They put some food grains in it also. Now the little birds were happy.

Learning to Use the Language (Pairwork)

Read the following poster very carefully.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books 11

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

Activity 12.

Write the dialogue using the hints given in the poster on page

Partner 1 : Engage in a dialogue with your friend to invite him/her over to your home for dinner.
Partner 2 : Decline the invitation after asking questions about the day, time, occasion, etc.
Partner 1 : Hi Ramesh ! You are back to India. I am going to arrange a dinner party tonight. Would you like to come over for that ?
Partner 2 : What is the time? Where are you going to arrange it ? Is this some special occasion ?
Partner 1 : Tonight at 9 p.m. at hotel Sun. Forgot ! It is my birthday today.
Partner 2 : I’d love to come. But I’m afraid I am busy tonight.

Comprehension Of Stanzas

Read the following stanza (extract) and answer the questions given below each :

1. Some books I’ll never give away,
Though old and worn, their binding torn,
Upon my shelves they’ll always stay,
Alive, still read, still fresh each dawn,
Their magic moments never gone.

1. What shows the poet’s love for books ?
क्या बात पुस्तकों के प्रति कवि के प्रेम को व्यक्त करती है ?

2. What do the words ‘Their magic moments’ suggest ?
“Their Magic Moments” शब्द क्या सुझाव देते है?

3. Write in three or four sentences, the central idea of the poem.
तीन या चार पंक्तियों में कविता का केंद्रीय भाव लिखें।
Answer:
1. Some of the poet’s books are old and torn. Still he enjoys reading them everyday.
He keeps them on his shelves.
2. “Their magic moments’ means time for the poet to read his books. He reads them every morning.
3. Read C- ‘Central Idea of the poem.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

नोट : अन्य Comprehension Stanzas के लिए Textual Exercises में दिए गए Comprehension का अध्ययन करें।

Word Meanings
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books 9

We Who Love Books Poem Summary in English

We Who Love Books Summary in English

Books have timeless value. They never become old. They are as fresh today as they were long ago. They are a big source of joy and information. The poet has great love for books. He loves reading books since he was ten. He keeps them on his shelves. Though the binding of some books is torn yet he never parts with them. He still reads them with the same interest. He calls them familiar and good friends.The poet says that great thoughts and great verse never lose their charm. They always stand the test of time. Lucky are those who love books.

We Who Love Books Summary in Hindi

पुस्तकों के महत्त्व की कोई समय सीमा नहीं होती। वे आज भी उतनी ही ताज़ा लगती हैं, जितनी वे बहुत समय पहले थीं। वे खुशी तथा जानकारी का बहुत बड़ा साधन हैं। कवि को पुस्तकों से बहुत अधिक प्रेम है। उसे दस साल की आयु से पुस्तकें पढ़ने से प्रेम है। वह उन्हें अपनी शेल्वज़ पर रखता है। यद्यपि उनमें से कुछ पुस्तकों की सिलाई खुल चुकी है, तो भी वह उन्हें वहां से कभी नहीं हटाता। वह अब भी उन्हें पूरी रुचि के साथ पढ़ता है। वह उन्हें जाने-पहचाने और अच्छे मित्र कह कर बुलाता है। कवि कहता है कि महान् विचारों तथा महान् काव्यांश का आकर्षण कभी समाप्त नहीं होता। वे समय की कसौटी पर खरे उतरते हैं। वे लोग भाग्यशाली हैं, जिन्हें पुस्तकों से प्रेम है।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Poem 3 We Who Love Books

Central Idea Of The Poem

The poem brings out the pleasure of reading. Love for books is a great blessing. It is a joy for ever. The books have everlasting value. The great thoughts of books are always fresh and stand the test of time. Therefore lucky are those who love books and enjoy books.

Class 8 PSEB Solutions Poetry

Marco Polo Question Answer Class 8 English Solutions Chapter 8 PSEB Solutions

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class English Book Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Class 8th English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo Question Answers

Marco Polo Class 8 Questions and Answers

Activity 1.

Look up the following words in a dictionary. You should seek the following information about the words and put them in your WORDS notebook.

1. Meaning of the word as used in the lesson (adjective/noun/verb. etc.)
2. Pronunciation (The teacher may refer to the dictionary or a mobile phone for correct pronunciation.)
3. Spellings.

merchant adventurous explorer caravan fascinated
grandness luxury spy translated inspired

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

Vocabulary Expansion

Activity 2.

Make sentences of the idioms you have studied. (Teachers must help students make sentences.)

English idioms, proverbs and expressions are an important part of everyday English. Idioms are a group of words established by usage and have a different meaning than is apparent from the words, e.g. over the moon, see the light. They come up all the time in both written and spoken English. Let us look at some idioms and their meanings.

S.No Idiom Meaning
1. beat about the bush avoiding the main topic, not speaking directly about the problem
2. every cloud has a silver lining be positive, even difficult times will lead to better days
3. actions speak louder than words people’s intentions can be judged better by what they do than what they say
4. add insult to injury to further add to a loss with mockery or indignity; to worsen an unfavourable situation
5. the ball is in your court it is up to you to take the next decision or step
6. blessing in disguise something good that isn’t recognized at first
7. cry over spilt milk when you complain about a loss from the past
8. kill two birds with one stone to achieve two things with one action
9. once in a blue moon happens very rare
10. turn over a new leaf to change one’s behaviour usually in a positive way

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

Sentences :

1. Don’t beat about the bush; come to the point.
2. Don’t be upset. Every cloud has a silver lining in it.
3. We must show our talent in actions. Actions speak louder than words.
4. Don’t hurt his feelings more by adding insult to his injury.
5. Now it is you to save the situation. The ball is in your court.
English education proved blessing in disguise for the Indians:
7. It is foolish to cry over spilt milk. You yourself wasted the money.
8. He killed two birds with one stone by selling his old car at high price.
9. Such achievements are won once in a blue moon.
10. His sudden success turned a new leaf in his life.

Learning to Read and Comprehend

Activity 3.

Read the lesson and answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Who was Marco Polo ?
मार्को पोलो कौन था ?
Answer:
Marco Polo was a merchant and an adventurer of Italy.

Question 2.
When and where was Marco Polo born?
मार्को पोलो का जन्म कब और कहां हुआ ?
Answer:
Marco Polo was born in 1524 in Venice.

Question 3.
Why did Marco Polo visit so many cities?
मार्को पोलो ने इतने सारे शहरों की यात्रा क्यों की ?
Answer:
Marco visited so many cities because he wanted to learn about people, their food habits and their culture there.

Question 4.
Who accompanied Marco Polo during his visits ?
मार्को पोलो की यात्राओं में कौन उसके साथ घुमने गया ?
Answer:
His father Niccolo and his uncle Maffeo accompanied Marco Polo during his visits.

Question 5.
Which features of the Chinese cities impressed Marco Polo ?
मार्को पोलो को चीन की किन विशेषताओं ने प्रभावित किया ?
Answer:
The grandness and greatness of the Chinese cities impressed him.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

Question 6.
How did he serve the Chinese Emperor ?
उसने चीन के शासक की सेवा किस प्रकार की ?
Answer:
He served the Chinese Emperor as a messenger and as a spy.

Question 7.
After how many years did Marco Pole return to Venice ?
कितने वर्षों के बाद मार्को पोलो वेनिस वापिस लौटा ?
Answer:
Marco Pole returned Venice after 24 years.

Question 8.
What was the effect of the war between Venice and Genoa upon Marco Polo ?
वेनिस और जेनोआ के युद्ध का मार्को पोलो पर क्या प्रभाव पड़ा ?
Answer:
Marco Polo was captured and put behind the bars in Genoa prison.

Question 9.
Name the book that contains detailed stories about Marco’s journeys.
मार्को पोलो की यात्राओं के विवरण संबंधी पुस्तक का नाम बताओ।
Answer:
The name of the book is ‘The Travels of Marco Polo.’

Question 10.
Who carried the book, ‘The Travels of Marco Polo’ along with him on his travels ? Why?
‘ट्रैवलज़ ऑफ मार्को पोलो’ नामक पुस्तक को कौन अपनी यात्रा पर साथ ले गया और क्यों ?
Answer:
Christopher Columbus carried this book with him because he was greatly inspired by the book.

Activity 4

Read the story and fill in the blanks.
(a) Marco Polo set out on his first voyage at the age of …….
(b) He visited the holy city of …………….
(c) He was released from the prison in …………..
(d) He was married to ……
(e) Marco Polo passed away on ………….. at the age of …………….
Answer:
(a) 17
(b) Jerusalem
(c) 1299
(d) Donata Badoer,
(e) 8 January, 70.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

Activity 5

Imagine that you are a traveller. Write the experiences of your visit to any place in five sentences.
Answer:
Visit to a Jaipur It was Sunday. I with my friend visited Jaipur. We all arrived at Jaipur around 11 a.m. We went straight to a hotel Amer on M.I. Road. After a light breakfast we went to Amber fort. We had a ride on the elephant. It was fantastic! Then we saw the Jantar Mantar. It was brilliant. Around 1 p.m. we came out and went to the hotel. Had our lunch. In the evening we all went to Hawa Mahal and Ram Bagh Place. We meant to Chowkhi Dhani and had an experience of Rajasthan over the years. In this chapter we will do Active and Passive Voice of the Continuous and Prefect form of all the tenses i.e.
(a) Present Continuous Tense
(b) Past Continuous Tense
(c) Present Prefect Tense
(d) Past Perfect Tense
(e) Future Perfect

Tense Present Continuous Tense

Rule : is/am/are + being + 3rd form of the verb
Examples :
Active : He is telling a story.
Passive : A story is being told by him.
Active : She is not reading a book.
Passive : A book is not being read by her.

Activity 6.

Change the voice of the following sentences :

(a) The leader is making a speech.
Answer:
A speech is being made by the leader.

(b) They are playing hockey.
Answer:
Hockey is being played by them.

(c) Sudhir is telling a story.
Answer:
A story is being told by Sudhir

(d) Randhir is cleaning his kitchen.
Answer:
His kitchen is being cleaned by Randhir.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

(e) The girls are making chairs.
Answer:
Chairs are being made by the girls.

(f) The workers are not repairing the road.
Answer:
The road is not being repaired by the workers.

(g) We are not taking orders.
Answer:
Orders are not taken by us.

(h) I am not favouring you.
Answer:
You are not being favoured by me.

(i) Are they knocking at the door?
Answer:
Is the door being knocked at by them?

(j) Is he serving his country ?
Answer:
Is his country being served by him ?

Past Continuous Tense

Rule : was/werel + being + 3rd form of the verb
Examples :
Active : The boys were playing football.
Passive : Football was being played by the boys.
Active : The men were not repairing the road.
Passive : The road was not being repaired by the men.
Active : Was Meera singing a song ?
Passive : Was a song being sung by Meera ?

Activity 7.

Change the voice of the following sentences.

(a) They were chasing the thief.
Answer:
The thief was being chased by them.

(b) The boys were making a noise.
Answer:
A noise was being made by the boys.

(c) I was preparing my lesson.
Answer:
My lesson was being prepared by me.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

(d) We were helping the poor.
Answer:
The poor were being helped by us.

(e) She purchased a book named “The Patriot’.
Answer:
A book named ‘The Patriot’ was purchased by her.

(f) The children were not reading books.
Answer:
Books were not being read by the children.

(g) He was not closing his shop.
Answer:
His shop was not being closed by him.

(h) The servant was not cleaning the room.
Answer:
The room was not being cleaned by the servant.

(i) They were stealing our books.
Answer:
Our books were being stolen by them.

(j) Who was insulting the beggar?
Answer:
By whom was the beggar being insulted ?

Future Continuous Tense

Note : Sentences belonging to this tense cannot be changed into Passive Voice.

Present Perfect Tense
Rule : has/have + been +3rd form of the verb

Examples :
Active : I have won the match.
Passive : The match has been won by me.
Active : He has not spoken the truth.
Passive : The truth has not been spoken by him.
Active : Has she read the letter?
Passive : Has the letter been read by her ?

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

Activity 8.

Change the voice of the following sentences.

(a) She has torn my book.
Answer:
My book has been torn by her.

(b) You have cheated everybody.
Answer:
Everybody has been cheated by you.

(c) We have said our prayers.
Answer:
Our prayers have been said by us.

(d) Seema has written a poem.
Answer:
A poem has been written by Seema.

(e) Kavita has missed the bus.
Answer:
The bus has been missed by Kavita.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

(f) She has not stolen my camera.
Answer:
My camera has not been stolen by her.

(j) The teacher has not scolded us.
Answer:
We have not been scolded by the teacher.

(h) I have not told the entire story.
Answer:
The entire story has not been told by me.

(i) Have you seen a zoo ?
Answer:
Has a zoo been seen by you?

(j) Has the teacher marked you absent ?
Answer:
Have you been marked absent by the teacher ?

Past Perfect Tense

Rule : had + been + 3rd form of the verb

Examples :

Active : The gardener had watered the plants.
Passive : The plants had been watered by the gardener.
Active : She had not told a lie.
Passive : A lie had not been told by her.
Active : Had our team won the match ?
Passive : Had the match been won by our team ?

Activity 9.

Change the voice of the following sentences.

(a) Abdul had lost his bag.
Answer:
His bag had been lost by Abdul.

(b) He had posted the letter.
Answer:
The letter had been posted by him.

(c) She had made a frock.
Answer:
A frock had been made by her.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

(d) I had learnt my lesson.
Answer:
My lesson had been learnt by me.

(e) The gardener had watered the plants.
Answer:
The plants had been watered by the gardener.

(f) We had not plucked the flowers.
Answer:
The flowers had not been plucked by us.

(g) He had not killed the snake.
Answer:
The snake had not been killed by him.

(h) I had not seen a lion before.
Answer:
A lion had not been seen before by me.

(i) Had you hidden the books ?
Answer:
Had the books been hidden by you ?

(j) Had our team won the match ?
Answer:
Had the match been won by our team?

Future Perfect Tense

Rule : will/shall + have + been +3rd form of the verb.

Examples :

Active : They will have taken their lunch.
Passive : Their lunch will have been taken by them.
Active : I shall not have finished my work.
Passive : My work will not have been finished by me.
Active : Who will have done this?
Passive : By whom will this have been done?

Activity 10.

Change the voice of the following sentences.

(a) Radha will have said her prayers.
Answer:
Her prayers will have been said by Radha.

(b) You will have bought a new house.
Answer:
A new house will have been bought by you.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

(c) Gurpreet will have painted the doors.
Answer:
The doors will have been painted by Gurpreet.

(d) They will have caught the train.
Answer:
The train will have been caught by them.

(e) Nobody will have betrayed you.
Answer:
You will have been betrayed by nobody.

(f) The tiger will not have killed the deer
Answer:
The deer will not have been killed by the tiger.

(g) I shall have taken my lunch.
Answer:
My lunch will have been taken by me.

(h) Will the letter have been posted by him?
Answer:
Will he have posted the letter?

(i) Will they have checked the accounts ?
Answer:
Will the accounts have been checked by them ?

(j) Will you have received the money?
Answer:
Will the money have been received by you ?

Let’s have a quick revision of Active and Passive voice rules using the table given below.

From Active to Passive 

Tense Rule Active Voice Passive Voice
Present
Indefinite
is/am/are +V3 My mother bakes cakes. Cakes are baked by my brother.
Present Continuous is/am/are + being + V3 My mother is baking cakes. Cakes are being baked by my mother.
Present Perfect has/have + been + V3 My mother has baked cakes. Cakes have been baked by my mother.
Past Indefinite was/were + V3 My mother baked cakes. Cakes were baked by my mother.
Past Continuous was/were + being + V3 My mother was baking cakes. Cakes were being baked by my mother.
Past Perfect had + been + V3 My mother had baked cakes. Cakes had been baked by my mother.
Future Indefinite will/shall + be + V3 My mother will bake cakes. Cakes will be baked by my mother.
Future Perfect will/shall + have + been + V3 My mother will have baked cakes. Cakes will have been baked by my mother.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

Learning to Listen

Activity 11.

Listen to the announcements being made on a railway station and fill in the given blanks.

Announcement 1

The announcement was to inform the travellers going to …………… that the ……………. Express departing from …………. will now …………. from platform number …………… at …………… pm and not from platform number …………..
Answer:
1. Jammu
2. Patna Jammu
3. New Delhi
4. depart
5. 13
6.5: 23 pm
7. 10

Announcement 2

(a) What is the announcement about ?
Answer:
It is about the safety of travellers going to Jammu from New Delhi.

(b) How is safety ensured ?
Answer:
It is secured through 24 hour CCTV recording.

(c) Why are the travellers asked not to leave their luggage unattended ?
Answer:
They are advised to do this because unattended luggage may cause disorder and scare.

(d) What will the security service staff do with the unattended luggage ?
Answer:
They will remove it without warning or destroy it.

(e) What are the travellers advised to do on finding a suspicious item ?
Answer:
They are asked to call the staff of the Indian Railways.

(f) What are the train passengers asked to do whilst waiting for the train?
Answer:
They are asked to stand back behind the yellow line.

Learning to Speak (Role Play – Pairwork)

Activity 12

Scene : You are Aryan. Your mother needs money and asks you to get the money from an ATM. She gives you the security PIN along with the ATM card. When you reach the ATM, you forget the PIN. You try to take out the money using the wrong PIN. Your ATM card gets sucked by the machine.

One of you will be Aryan and one will be a bank employee. Aryan will complain to the bank employee regarding the sucked ATM card and request the bank employee to return the card to him. You may use the following words/phrases

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

(a) wanted to withdraw money
(b) inserted the card
(c) forgot the PIN
(d) account holder
(e) computerized machine
(f) block
(g) my mother’s account
(h) sucked the card
(i) how long
(j) registered address
(k) two weeks Book

Employee : What is your problem ? How can I help you ?

Aryan : The ATM machine has sucked my ATM card.
Book Employee : What did you do there?
Aryan : I wanted to withdraw some money from my mother’s account. I inserted the card in the hole. But I forgot PIN and used a wrong code. Soon my card was sucked up. Book
Employee : When did all this happen?
Aryan : Only 30 mintues before.
Book Employee : It is computerized machine. But don’t worry. Give your complaint in written. Write your registered mobile number and registered address on it. If it is not a fraud case, your card will be back within two weeks.

Learning to Write

Activity 13.

Study the figure below. It is a conversation between a travel agent and his client. Read all the sentences given in the bubbles and mark them with numbers from 1 to 18 in the order they should occur in a conversation.
.PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo 1

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

Learning to Use the Language

In our everyday communication the most important element is asking/framing and answering questions. Asking questions is a skill that must be practised all the time. · Look at the table below to understand how questions are framed grammatically.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo 2
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo 3
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo 4

Activity 14.

You are the monitor of your class and you have to introduce your new teacher to your class fellows. Make a list of questions that you will ask your teacher before you introduce him/her to the class. You can ask questions based on the given hints.

  • name of the teacher
  • place she/he comes from
  • subject she/he teaches
  • why she/he was interested in that subject
  • what her/his other interests are
  • what her/his views are regarding environment/global warming
  • what she/he would like to do about it
  • what she/he would like to do in the future

You must work in groups and prepare a written list of the questions. Also think of possible answers to the questions. After you have done that, you must practise the interview questions by playing the roles of the monitor and the new teacher and students.

  • The monitor will introduce the teacher.
  • The students will ask questions from the teacher.
  • The teacher will answer the questions.

Answer:
विधार्थी स्वयं करें

List of Questions Monitor

  • What is your good name sir/madam?
  • Where do you come from?
  • Which subjects do you teach?
  • What makes you interested in these subjects?
  • Would you tell us about some of your other interests?
  • What are your views about the burning problems of environmental pollution and global warming?
  • How can you help solve these problems?
  • What are your future plans about your career?

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

New Teacher.
Your questions are worth asking. My answers to these questions are.

  • My name is Vineete Sharma.
  • I am from Ludhiana.
  • I have mastery over spoken English and English grammar.
  • I am also interested in poetry and writing skill.
  • I am also a good speaker and a hockey player.
  • Global warming is mainly the result of increasing environmetal pollution.
  • It is a big threat to life on our planet.
  • I would start a drive to check the problem.
  • I would awaken the people too.
  • As regards my future plans, I have no clear-cut vision.

Monitor : Dear class-fellows, you can see that you are going to have a great teacher. I hope he can mould us into true citizens and can serve the cause of education a great deal.
Students : Thank you, madam. We promise to fully cooperate with you.

Comprehension Of Passages

Read the following passages and answer the questions given below each :

Marco Polo was a merchant and an adventurer. He travelled with his father and uncle from Venice (Italy) to China. Marco Polo spent 17 years in China before returning to Venice. Let us read and learn more about this adventurous explorer.

Long, long ago when there were no planes and trains, no cars and buses, people had to travel to other countries by ship or caravan. Marco Polo was one such traveller who went to many countries because he wanted to learn about the people, their food habits and their culture.

1. Who accompanied Marco Polo on his travels ?
मार्को पोलो की यात्राओं पर उसके साथ कौन गया ?

2. What did he want to learn during his travels ?
वह अपनी यात्राओं के दौरान क्या सीखना चाहता था ?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) Marco spent on travelling 17 years in Europe.
(b) Marco Polo was an adventurous explorer.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Marco Polo was one such traveller …….. countries.
(b) Long ago people travelled to other countries by ………….

Match the words with their meaning :

(i) travels go along
(ii) accompany journeys
discoveries

Answer:
1. His father and uncle accompany Marco on his travels.
2. He wanted to learn about the people, their food habits and their culture.
3.
(a) False
(b) True
4.
(a) Marco Polo was one such traveller who went to many countries.
(b) Long ago people travelled to other countries by ship or caravan.
Or
(i) travels — journeys
(ii) accompany — go along

(2) The wealth and luxury of the Chinese cities impressed Marco Polo. He was fascinated by the grandness and the greatness of Kublai Khan’s court. It was nothing like he had experienced in Europe. The capital city of Kinsay was large but well organised and clean. The roads were wide. All this was well beyond anything he had experienced in Venice.

Everything from the food to the people to the animals, like orangutans and rhinos, were new and interesting. Marco Polo lived in China for many years and learnt to speak the local language. He travelled throughout China. He served as a messenger and spy for the emperor. He visited a lot of countries in Western Asia, North Africa and Southern Europe.

1. What fascinated Marco Polo ?
मार्को पोलो को किस चीज़ ने आकर्षित किया ?

2. Mention any two features of the capital city of Kinsay.
किनजे की राजधानी शहर की कोई दो विशेषताएं बताएं।

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your ansewr-book :
(a) Foods to the people and animals were new and interesting.
(b) Marco Polo lived in China for a few years.

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Marco Polo learnt to speak the local language of China for …
(b) He served as messenger and spy for …………..

Match the words with their meaning :

(i) spy comfort
(ii) luxury messenger
detective

Answer:
1. The grandness and greatness of Kublai Khan’s court fascinated Marco Polo.
2.
(a) It was large and well-organised.
(b) It was clean.
3.
(a) True
(b) False
4.
(a) Marco Polo learnt to speak local language of China for many years.
(b) He served as messenger and spy for the Emperor.
Or
(i) spy — detective
(ii) luxury — comfort.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

(3) After travelling for twenty-four years, Marco along with his father and uncle decided to return to Venice. They had left home in 1271 and finally returned in 1295. A few years after returning home, Venice fought a war with the city of Genoa.

Marco was captured and put in a Genoese prison. He was released from prison in 1299. He became a wealthy merchant. He married a lady named Donata Badoer and had three children. He died on 8 January 1324 at the age of 70 and was buried in the church of San Lorenzo in Venice.

1. When did Marco and his party return home?
मार्को और उसका दल वापिस कब आया ?

2. Where was Marco buried ?
मार्को को कहां दफ़नाया गया ?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your ansewr-book :
(a) Marco died in 1295.
(b) He was released from prison in 1299.

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) He married a lady named ……….
(b) Venice fought a war with ………….
Or
Write the meanings of the following words in English : (Any two) finally, wealthy, captured
Answer:
1. Marco and his party returned home in 1295.
2. Marco was buried in the church of San Lorenzo in Venice.
3.
(a) False
(b) True
4.
(a) He married a lady named Donata Badoer.
(b) Venice fought a war with the city of Genoa.
or
in the end, rich and prosperous, arrested.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

(4) It was in the prison that Marco met a well-known story writer. Marco narrated detailed stories of his journeys to the writer, who wrote all the stories in a book called The Travels of Marco Polo. It became a very popular book. It was translated into many languages and read throughout Europe. It is said that Christopher Columbus, another explorer was greatly inspired by the book. It is believed that he carried it along with him on his travels.

1. Who did Marco meet when he was in prison ?
जब मार्को जेल में था, तो वह किससे मिला ?
2. Which book did Columbus carry along with him on his travels ?
अपनी यात्राओं पर कोलम्बस कौन-सी पुस्तक साथ ले गया ?
3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) Christopher Columbus was a story writer.
(b) “The Travels of Marco Polo’ was translated into many languages.
4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) The book ‘The Travels of Marco Polo’ was read …………..
(b) Marco narrated …………………. to a writer.
Or
Match the words with their meaning :

(i) well-known unidentified
(ii) inspired encouraged
famous

Answer:
1. In prison, Marco met a well-known story-writer.
2. On his travels, Columbus carried along famous book called ‘The Travels of Marco
3.
(a) False
(b) True
4.
(a) The book “The Travels of Marco Polo’ was read throughout Europe.
(b) Marco narrated detailed stories of his journey to a writer.
Or
(i) well-known — famous
(ii) inspired — encouraged

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

Use Of Words And Phrases In Sentences

1. Explorer – (discoverer) – Many explorers lost their lives during third dangerous travels.
2. Culture – (society/civilization) – We love Indian culture and its values.
3. Adventures – (daring deeds) – The adventures of our soldiers are well known.
4. Wealth – (money, property) – He gathered a huge wealth by working hard.
5. Merchant – (trader) – His father is a big cloth merchant.
6. Finally – in the end) – Finally he left his studies and started a business.
7. Prison – (jail) – Gandhiji was put in prison many a time.
8. Captured – (arrested) – The culprit was captured and punished.
9. Inspired – (encouraged) – Inspired by his father he earned a lot of money.
10. Beyond – (out of reach) – To buy this car is beyond my sources.

Word Meanings
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo 5

Marco Polo Summary in Hindi

Marco Polo was ………….. many adventures.

मार्को पोलो एक व्यापारी और साहसिक पुरुष था। उसने अपने पिता और चाचा के साथ वेनिस (इटली) से चीन की यात्रा की। वेनिस लौटने से पहले मार्को पोलो 17 वर्ष तक चीन में रहा। आओ हम इस साहसिक खोजों के बारे में पढ़ें और उसकी अधिक जानकारी प्राप्त करें।

बहुत समय पहले जब हवाई जहाज, रेलगाड़ियां, कारें तथा बसें कुछ भी नहीं था तो लोगों को दूसरे देशों के लिए समुद्री जहाज़ अथवा काफ़िलों में यात्रा करनी पड़ती थी। मार्को पोलो उन यात्रियों में से एक था जिन्होंने बहुत सारे देशों की यात्रा इसलिए की थी, क्योंकि वे वहां के लोगों, उनके खाने की आदतों और उनके रीति-रिवाजों को जानने के इच्छुक थे।

मार्को पोलो का जन्म 1254 में वेनिस में हुआ। जब वह 17 वर्ष का हुआ तो वह अपनी पहली यात्रा पर अपने पिता निकोलो (Niccolo) और अपने चाचा माफो (Maffeo) के साथ निकला। वह चीन की यात्रा करना चाहता था ताकि उस देश और उसके लोगों के बारे में जानकारी जुटा सके। यात्रा के दौरान वह बहुत से जाने-माने शहरों में गया और उसने येरूशलम के पवित्र शहर सहित बहुत से स्थल देखे। उसने हिंदु-कुश पर्वत, प्रशा और गो-मरुस्थल भी देखे। वह भिन्न-भिन्न प्रकार के लोगों से मिला और उसने बहुत से साहसिक कार्य किए।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 8 Marco Polo

The wealth and luxury…… …………… ever seen before.

चीनी शहरों की धन संपत्ति और विलासता ने मार्को पोलो को बहुत प्रभावित किया। वह कुबलई खां के दरबार की भव्यता और महानता से बहुत अधिक आकर्षित हुआ। यूरोप में प्राप्त उसके अनुभव के मुकाबले यह कुछ भी नहीं था। राजधानी शहर किनसे (Kinsay) न केवल बहुत ही बड़ा था, बल्कि साफ़-सुथरा और पूर्ण रूप से व्यवस्थित था। – सड़कें चौड़ी थीं। यह सब कुछ तो उसके वेनिस के अनुभव से कहीं अधिक अच्छा था।

लोगों तथा जानवरों जैसे आरंगुटान (गुरिल्ला) और राइनो (गेंडा) को मिलने वाले भोजन तक हर चीज़ नई और रोचक थी। … मार्को पोलो चीन में बहुत वर्षों तक रहा और वहां उसने स्थानीय भाषा को बोलना सीखा। उसने पूरे चीन की यात्रा की। उसने सम्राट का दूत और जासूस बन कर कार्य किया।

उसने पश्चिमी एशिया, उत्तरी अफ्रीका तथा दक्षिणी यूरोप के बहुत से देशों की यात्रा की। – इन यात्राओं के दौरान उसने भिन्न-भिन्न संस्कृतियों, भोजनों और लोगों के बारे में जानकारी प्राप्त की। उसने ऐसे बहुत से स्थानों और बहुत-सी चीजों को देखा जो इससे पहले यूरोप में आए किसी भी यात्री ने नहीं देखा।

After travelling ………….. on his travels.

मार्को पोलो ने अपने पिता और अंकल के साथ चौबीस (24) वर्षों की यात्रा के बाद वेनिस वापिस लौटने का फैसला किया। उन्होंने 1271 में अपना घर छोड़ा था और अंततः 1295 में वापिस पहंचे। घर पहुंचने के कुछ ही वर्षों बाद वेनिस का जेनोआ (Ogenoa) के साथ युद्ध छिड़ गया। मार्को को बंदी बना लिया गया और जेनोआ को जेल में डाल दिया गया। उसे 1299 में जेल से रिहा किया गया। वह एक धनी व्यापारी बन गया।

उसने Donata Badoer नाम की स्त्री से विवाह किया और उनके तीन बच्चे हुए। उसका देहांत 8 जनवरी, 1324 को 70 वर्ष की आयु में हुआ और उसे वेनिस की चर्च San Lorenzo में दफ़नाया गया। – जेल में मार्को एक प्रसिद्ध कहानी लेखक से मिला। मार्को ने अपनी यात्राओं की विस्तृत जानकारी लेखक को बताई जिसने “ट्रैवल्स ऑफ़ मार्को पोलो” नामक पुस्तक में सभी कहानियां लिखीं। यह पुस्तक बहुत ही लोकप्रिय हुई।

इसका अनुवाद बहुत-सी भाषाओं में किया गया और यह सारे यूरोप में पढ़ी गईं। ऐसा कहा जाता है कि एक अन्य खोजी क्रिसटोफर कोलम्बस भी इस पुस्तक से बहुत प्रभावित हुआ। ऐसा विश्वास किया जाता है कि वह यह पुस्तक अपनी यात्राओं पर साथ ले गया था।

Translation From English To Hindi

1. Marco Polo was a merchant and an adventurer. — मार्को पोलो एक व्यापारी और साहसिक पुरुष था।
2. He wanted to learn about the people, their food habits and their culture. — वह लोगों के बारे में, उनके खाने की आदतों और उनके रीति-रिवाजों को जानने का इच्छुक था।
3. Marco Polo was born in Venice in 1254.– मार्को पोलो का जन्म 1254 में वेनिस में हुआ।
4. He wanted to visit China. — वह चीन की यात्रा करना चाहता था।
5. He also saw the mountains of Hindu Kush. — उसने हिंदु कुश के पर्वत भी देखे। .
6. He met a lot of different poeple. — वह भिन्न प्रकार के लोगों को मिला।
7. It was nothing like he had experienced in Europe. — यूरोप में प्राप्त उसके अनुभव के मुकाबले यह कुछ भी नहीं था।
8. The roads were wide.– सड़कें चौड़ी थीं।
9. Marco Polo lived China for many years. — मार्को पोलो चीन में बहुत वर्षों तक रहा |
10. They had left home in 1271. — उन्होंने 1271 में अपना घर छोड़ा या
11. He was released from prison in 1299. — उसे 1299 में जेल से रिहा किया गया |
12. It became a very popular book. यह पुस्तक बहुत ही लोकप्रिय हुई।
13. It was translated into many languages. — इसका अनुवाद बहुत – सी भाषाओ में किया गया
14. Marco met a well-known story writer.– मार्को एक प्रसिद्ध कहानी लेखक से मिला

English Guide for Class 8 PSEB Prose

The Old Sage and the Brothers Question Answer Class 8 English Solutions Chapter 4 PSEB Solutions

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class English Book Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Class 8th English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers Question Answers

The Old Sage and the Brothers Class 8 Questions and Answers

Activity 1.

Look up the following words in a dictionary. You should seek the following information about the words and put them in your WORDS notebook. :
1. Meaning of the word as used in the lesson (adjective/noun/verb. etc.)
2. Pronunciation (The teacher may refer to the dictionary or a mobile phone for correct pronunciation.)
3. Spellings.

summoned acquiring approached delighted granted
annoyed poultry deny journey snatched

Vocabulary Expansion

Look at the following sentences.
(a) I enjoyed the film.
(b) The film gave us a lot of enjoyment.
In the sentence (a) the word enjoyed is a verb and in sentence (b) the word enjoyment is a noun. When you add suffixes such as ‘-ment, ‘-ance’, ‘-age’, ‘-ion’, ‘-ness’, -ať, -ure’, etc. to a word, they become nouns. Sometimes if you remove the suffix from a word, it becomes a noun.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

For example :
(a) escaped
If you remove -d’, the word becomes ‘escape’ which is both a noun and a verb.
I had a narrow escape. (noun).
The thief wanted to escape. (verb)

Activity 2.

Let’s do the following activity. Make nouns of the given words.

1. try — trail
2. distract — distraction
3. move — movement
4. educate — education
5. inform — informity
6. agree — agreement
7. pay — payment
8. argue — argument
9. pass — passage
10. bag — baggage
11. marry — marriage
12. refuse — refusal
13. propose — purpose
14. arrive — arrival
15. fail — failure
16. press — pressure
17. confuse — confusion
18. decide — decision
19. revise — revision
20. teach — teaching

Learing to Read and Comprehend

Activity 3

Read the story and answer the following questions.

a. How many sons did the old farmer have ?
किसान के कितने पुत्र थे ?
Answer:
The farmer had three sons.

b. Why did the farmer summon his sons ?
किसान ने अपने पुत्रों को क्यों बुलाया ?
Answer:
The farmer had grown old. He summoned his sons to divide his property among them.

c. What had the farmer decided to do?
किसान ने क्या करने का निर्णय लिया था ?
Answer:
The farmer had decided to give his three sons a field and a house each.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

d. How did Harry help the sage ?
हैरी ने सघु की सहायता कैसे की ?
Answer:
Harry gave the sage a Chapatti to eat.

e. What did Harry ask for ?
हैरी ने क्या मांगा ?
Answer:
Harry asked for a big house and ten cows.

f. Why could the sage not cross the river ?
साधु नदी क्यों न पार कर सका ?
Answer:
The sage could not cross the river because there was no boat.

g. How did Sandeep help the sage ?
संदीप ने साधु की सहायता कैसे की ?
Answer:
Sandeep carried the sage on his back across the river.

h. Did all the brothers keep their promise ?
क्या सभी भाइयों ने अपना वचन निभाया ?
Answer:
No, only Sandeep kept his promise.

i. Why did the sage snatch away the gifts from Harry and Raman ?
साधु ने हैरी तथा रमन से उपहार क्यों छीन लिए ?
Answer:
The sage snatched away the gifts from them because they did not keep their promise.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

j. What do you learn from this story?
आपको कहानी से क्या शिक्षा मिलती है ?
Answer:
One must keep one’s promise. It is our duty to help the poor and the needy.

Activity 4

Complete the following exercise on the basis of the lesson. Fill in the blanks.
(a) The farmer had …………. fields and three …….
(b) The sage made the brothers promise that they would help the ……………. and the
(c) The sage gave a piece of …………….. to Raman. (Choose the correct option.)
(i) cloth
(ii) stick
(iii) rope
(iv) cake
(d) Sandeep broke his promise. (True or False)
(e) The sage punished/did not punish Harry and Raman. (Choose the correct option.)
Answer:
(a) three, houses
(b) poor, needy
(c) stick
(d) False
(e) punished.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

Activity 5

Imagine that you are Harry. Use five sentences to narrate your feelings after your gifts were snatched away from you.
Answer:
I was shocked after my gifts were snatched away. I was rightly punished because I did not keep my word. I did not help the poor and the needy. The riches turned my head and made me selfish. Now I have realized my mistake and decided to work hard in life. I will help the poor and the needy too. Learning Language Verbs There are two forms of main verbs in English.
(a) The Finite Verbs
(b) The Non-finite Verbs

A. Finite Verbs

A finite verb is the form of a verb which is limited by the number, person and tense. For example :
1. I eat an apple daily.
2. She eats an apple daily.
3. We eat apples daily.
4. We ate an apple yesterday.
5. We will eat apples tomorrow.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

In the examples above, the verb ‘eat’ changes its forms with change in number, person or tense. Therefore, it can be called a finite verb. Finite Verb का वाक्य number, person या tense बदलने पर अपना रूप बदल लेता है।

B. Non-finite Verbs

A Non-finite form of a verb is not limited by number and person of a subject and has no tense. Non-finite verb-forms are typically infinitive forms with or without ‘to’ (e.g. to go, go), ing forms (e.g. going) and third form of the verb (e.g. finished, gone).
Let’s look at some examples :
(a) I want to eat an apple.
(b) She wants to eat an apple.
(c) We want to eat apples.
(d) They wanted to eat apples.
(e) They will want to eat apples tomorrow.
In the examples above, ‘to eat does not change even when the other verb ‘want keeps changing according to number, person or tense. Therefore, ‘to eat’ is a non-finite verb.

Types of Non-finite Verbs There are three types of Non-finite verbs. These are
(a) The infinitive
(b) The Gerund
(c) The Participles
Let us look at the following flowchart to have a better understanding.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers 1

B.1. The Infinitives
The infinitive can further be divided into two categories :
(a) Bare infinitive
(b) To-infinitive

(a) Bare infinitive
Bare Infinitives are also called plain infinitives or infinitives without ‘to’. , Use of Bare infinitives
The bare infinitive is used: with verbs such as ‘bid’, ‘have’, ‘left’, ‘make’
(a) The teacher made the student repeat the lesson.
(b) He bade me write an essay.
(c) He didn’t let me enter the room.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

2. with auxiliaries ‘will’, ‘would’, ‘shall’, ‘should’, ‘can’, ‘could’, ‘do’, ‘must’, ‘may, etc.
(a) You can go now.
(b) You shall know your results tomorrow.

3. with auxiliaries ‘neeď and dare’, the bare infinitive is used primarily in interrogative
and negative sentences, for example :
(a) Dare you go into the foresť at night ?
(b) He daren’t touch his sister’s mobile phone.
(c) Need you go home so soon ?
(d) You needn’t come.

4. with expressions like ‘would rather’, ‘rather than’, ‘had better’, etc.
(a) I would rather stay at home.
(b) You had better ask him for money.
(c) I would die rather than beg.

5. It may follow ‘but’ and ‘except
(a) He did nothing but cry.
(b) He does nothing except complain.

6. with questions denoting suggestions or advice and beginning with ‘why’, ‘why not.
(a) Why make such a noise over a small matter?
(b) Why not take your brother with you ?

(b) To-infinitive
Use of To-infinitive
The To-infinitive is used in many sentence constructions, often expressing the purpose of something or someone’s opinion about something.
1. as a noun :
(a) To speak effectively needs a lot of practice. (subject)
(b) To err is human. (infinitive as subject)
(c) To criticize others is an easy job. (subject)
(d) He likes to play cricket. (infinitive as objects)
(e) To play with fire is a very risky game. (subject)
(f) My duty is to serve my country. (as a complement to a linking verb)
(g) It is easier to preach than to practise. (after the dummy subject ‘it’)

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

2. as adverb to modify verbs and adjectives:
(a) We go to school to learn. (modifies the verb ‘go’)
(b) She’s hard to please. (modifies the adjective ‘hard’)

3. as adjective to qualify nouns:
(a) It was a match to remember (qualifies ‘match’)

4. as object complement
(a) He advised me to keep quiet.
(b) I advised him to accept the offer.

5. too + adjective/adverb + infinitive
(a) He’s too weak to walk.
(b) Mona is too young to understand this.
(c) They worked too slowly to achieve the target.

6. enough + infinitive
(a) He has enough money to pay the bill.
(b) He’s kind enough to help you.

Activity 6.

Pick out infinitives in the following sentences and underline them.

1. I saw him go.
2. He promised to come.
3. To forgive is difficult.
4. I watched her dance.
5. It is bad to cheat your family.
Answer:
1. I saw him go.
2. He promised to come.
3. To forgive is difficult.
4. I watched her dance.
5. It is bad to cheat your family.

Activity 7.

Fill in the blanks with appropriate non-finite forms.
(a) You ought …………….. (get) up earlier.
(b) It is easy ……………… (make) mistakes.
(c) He made me ………………. (repeat) the lessons.
(d) You needn’t ………………. (say) anything.
(e) Would you like ………………. (come) in my car ?
(f) He will be able …………… (swim) very soon.
Answer:
(a) to get
(b) to make
(c) repeat
(d) say
(e) to come
(f) swim.

Activity 8:

Combine the following pairs of sentences into one sentence using too/enough + infinitive.

(a) You are very young. You can’t have a gun.
Answer:
You are too young to have a gun.

(b) He’s very ill. He can’t eat anything.
Answer:
He is too ill to eat anything.

(c) Mickey was very foolish. He told lies to the police.
Answer:
Mickey was foolish enough to tell lies to the police.

(d) The fire isn’t very hot. It won’t boil the kettle.
Answer:
The fire is not hot enough to boil the kettle.

(e) I am rather old. I can’t walk that far.
Answer:
I am too old to walk that far.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

B.2. The Gerunds

Gerunds are verb + -ing form used as nouns. They can be used in the following ways :
(a) as a subject
(b) after prepositions
(c) after certain verbs
(d) in noun-compounds

Read the following sentences :

(a) Swimming is a good exercise.
The word ‘swimming’ is formed from the verb ‘swim’ by adding -ing to it. It therefore appears to be a verb. The word ‘swimming’ is the name of an action and is also the subject of the sentence. Hence, it does the work of a noun. The word ‘swimming is like a verb as well as a noun. It is therefore a verb — noun and is called a gerund.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers 4

Note : The form of the gerunds and of the present participles are identical. However, Gerunds are verbal nouns and Participles are verbal adjectives.

Examples :
(a) He is fond of riding.– Gerund
(b) Riding along the road, he saw a porcupine. — Present participle

Use of a gerund :

As already mentioned above, a gerund can be used as
(a) the subject of a verb : as
(i) Seeing is believing.
(ii) Collecting stamps is his hobby.

(b) as the object of a transitive verb : as
(i) I enjoy reading poetry.
(ii) i like watching the stars at night.

(c) as object of a preposition : as
(i) She’s fond of dancing
(ii) He was punished for telling a lie.

(d) after certain verbs : the gerund is used after verbs such as given below :
admit, avoid, consider, death, differ, delay, deny, detest, dread, enjoy, excuse, fancy, finish, forgive, imagine, invoke, keep, miss, pardon, postpone, prevent, recollect, resend,risk, stop, suggest, understand, etc.. )

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

Examples :
(a) He stopped writing as I entered the room.
(b) Please pardon my saying so.
(c) I enjoy watching this game.

Pick out gerunds in the following sentences :

(a) Swimming is a good exercise.
(b) I enjoy sleeping.
(c) Old men enjoy gossiping.
(d) I hate waiting.
(e) Stealing is a crime.
(f) am fond of walking.
(g) I am good at spelling.
(h) We took part in boating.
(i) My sister does not like cooking.
(j) She’s fond of dancing.
Answer:
(a) swimming
(b) sleeping
(c) gossiping
(d) waiting
(e) Stealing
(f) walking
(g) spelling
(h) boating
(i) cooking
(j) dancing.

Fill in the blanks with the correct gerund or infinitive form of the verbs given in the brackets.

(a) He agreed …………… me. (help).
(b) Suresh enjoys ……………. football. (play).
(c) We failed ………….. the train. (catch)
(d) They decided …………… hard. (work)
(e) She loves ……………. to music. (listen)
(f) I am learning how ………….. (drive)
(g) The class wanted …………… for a picnic. (go)
(h) He urged us ……………. faster. (work)
(i) She loves ……………. books. (read)
(j) I am looking forward to …………… you. (meer)
Answer:
(a) to help
(b) playing
(c) to catch
(d) to work
(e) listening
(f) to drive
(g) to go
(h) to work
(i) reading
(j) meet.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

Learning to Listen

Activity 10.

You will listen carefully to your teacher. Your teacher will read a passage slowly. Write in your notebook what you hear. Do not make spelling mistakes and put appropriate punctuation marks such as comma, question mark or full stop, where needed. (Refer to Appendix I at page no. 166.)
Answer:
Do it yourself.

Learning to Speak

Activity 11:

Look at the pictures given below. There are 8 differences. Do this activity with your partner. While identifying the differences, you all must speak in English only.

Spot the differences

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers 2

You may use sentences such as 1 can see a difference here
Answer.
1. I can see a difference here in the time. Left hand side clock shows 8.25 but right hand side clock shows 11.25 O’clock.
A —- B
2. Balls on the window rod —- No balls
3. Handles of the drawer are big —- small
4. Cusion of sofa set — one blue —- all yellow
5. Fruits in tray on table—more —- less
6. Book & sequence design —- different
7. Objects on shelf behind sofa —- different
8. Something kept on drawers —- nothing on drawers.

Learning to Write

Given below is an application written to the Principal of a school asking for exemption from examination. Read it carefully and also look at its format.
Answer:
The Principal
Dev Samaj Senior Secondary School
Jalandhar
Sir
I am a student of Class VIII A of your school. Our bimonthly exams are starting from November 01, 20….. Sir, I always stand first in all the exams. My sister’s wedding is falling on November 05, 20…. .As I am the only helping hand of my father, I can’t take the exam this time. This time, I request you to exempt me from the examination. I shall be very thankful to you.
Thanking you
Yours obediently
XYZ …….
Roll No. 21, VIII A
July 5, 20.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

Activity 12.

Write an application to your Principal asking for a School Leaving Certificate in the space given below. You must write.

  • your reason for leaving the school
  • when you will leave the school
  • where you will take admission after leaving the school

Answer:
The Principal
Govt. Senior Secondary School Hamirpur
Sir
I am a student of class VIII of your school. My father has been transferred to XYZ city. He is to report for duty there within three days. All the members of our family are leaving tomorrow. My parents do not wish me to join a hostel. I am sorry to leave your good school, but I am helpless. I shall have to join some school at XYZ city. I have paid all the dues. Kindly issue my school leaving certificate and oblige. I shall be thankful to you for this.
Yours obediently
Om Mehta
VIII-D
March 8,20…..

Learning to Use the Language

Activity 13

What’s the problem? Do you mind if I – Go ahead!
Is it OK if – telling me – Thanks!
Here you are ! Could you turn – Can I borrow –

Conversation 1

Raghav : Yeah?
Gurtej : Hello, ……….. turn the music down, please? It’s one o’clock and I’m trying to sleep.
Raghav : Oh, sorry. Is that okay ?
Gurtej : Yes, ………. Perhaps I can get some sleep now. Good Night!
Answer:
1. could you
2. Thanks.

Conversation 2

Japtej : I’m sorry, leave early today? I’m going to take my dog to see the vet.
Palak : You’re going to take your dog to the vet ? What’s the matter with him ?
Japtej : I don’t know. That’s why I’m going to take him to the vet’s.
Palak : Oh, I see! Sure Thanks for
Answer:
1. Is it ok if I
2. Here you are !
3. telling me.

Conversation 3

Sheenam : Divyam, do you have your mobile phone with you ?
Divyam : Um … yes. Why ?
Sheenam : it, please? I need to make a quick call to my mother.
Divyam : OK,
Answer:
1. Can I borrow
2. go ahead !

Conversation 4

Jyoti : ………… change seats?
Rajneesh : Yes, all right ……. ?
Jyoti : I can’t see because of the sun.
Rajneesh : OK, then. Why don’t you sit there, next to Piyush.
Answer:
1. Do you mind if I
2. What is the problem ?

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

Activity 14 :
Given below are some polite requests with equally polite responses. Match the questions in Column A with the correct responses in Column B.
Answer:

S.No. Column A S.No. Column B
1. Can I have a glass of juice? 1. Yes, of course!
2. Is it alright if I make a phone call? 2. I said that some friends were coming over.
3. Could you say that again, please? 3. Well, OK, if it’s a local call.
4. Can I speak to you for a moment? 4. Oh sure, The remote’s on the table.
5. Do you mind if I look at your books? 5. Well, not really. Why can’t you come?
6. Is it OK if I miss the class tomorrow? 6. Of course, there’s some in the fridge.
7. Could you move a little, please? 7. You can borrow some if you want.
8. Do you mind if I turn the TV up? 8. Yes, sorry. I didn’t realise you wanted to sit down.

1. Of course, there’s some in the fridge.
2. Well, OK, if it’s a local call.
3. I said that some friends were coming over.
4. Yes, of course !
5. You can borrow some if you want.
6. Well, not really. Why can’t you come ?
7. Yes, sorry. I didn’t realise you wanted to sit down.
8. Oh sure, The remote’s on the table.

Comprehension Of Passages

Read the following passage and answer the questions given below each :

(1) Long time ago, a rich farmer summoned his three lazy sons. Harry, Raman and Sandeep and said, “I have grown old. I have decided to divide my property among you. As you all know, I own three fields and three houses. Each one of you will get a field and a house only if you prove that you are worth it”. The three sons were surprised. “What do you mean, father ?” cried they. The farmer said, “These fields and houses are the fruits of my hard work. All the three of you are very lazy. I want the three of you to find some work. Return to me after six months with your earnings. I will decide if you are worthy of acquiring my hard-earned property.” The three brothers set out in search of work, On the way, they sat down under a banyan tree to rest.

1. How could the sons gain their father’s property ?
पुत्र अपने पिता की संपत्ति कैसे प्राप्त कर सकते थे ?

2. Where did they take rest ?
उन्होंने आराम कहां किया?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) All the three sons were hard-working.
(b) The sons were given six months to prove their worth.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Each son will get …………
(b) The three sons set out in ……… of work

Match the words with their meanings :

(i) summoned called
(ii) acquire gain
put in jail

Answer:
1. The sons could gain it by proving themselves worth it.
2. They took rest under a banyan tree.
3.
(a) False
(b) True.
4.
(a) Each son will get a field and a house.
(b) The three sons set out in search of work.
Or
(i) summoned — called
(ii) acquire — gain

(2) Then the old sage said, “Promise me that if ever a poor man asks you for a cup of milk, you will not deny him.”
“It’s a gendeman’s promise”, said the lad “and whatsoever he wishes for milk, butter, curd, sweets, I will never deny.” The old sage smiled, “Do not break your promise.”
“I will not”, assured Harry.
The other two brothers continued on their way with the old.sage. They went on till they came to a stream. The old sage looked sad and worried. “Oh! There’s no boat. How will I cross the stream ?” Raman said very kindly. “Don’t worry! I’ll help you. I’ll carry you on my back.” After crossing the river, the three of them sat down for some rest.
The sage thanked Raman and said, “God bless you, son! Here is a gift for you.”
Raman was delighted. The sage gave him a piece of stick. Raman was surprised. “What is this ?” “It is a magic stick. It will grant you two wishes. Ask now.”

1. What was Harry’s gendeman promise ?
हैरी का सज्जन पुरुष वाला वचन क्या था?

2. Who gave a gift to Raman ? What was it ?
रमन को उपहार किसने दिया? यह क्या या?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) The sage crossed the river with the help of a boat.
(b) Harry assured the sage that he would not break his promise.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Raman offered to carry the sage across
(b) The old sage looked
Or
Match the words with their meanings :

(i) delighted refuse
(ii) deny happy/glad
wondered

Answer:
1. Harry’s promise was that he would never deny anything to the needy.
2. The sage gave a gift to Raman. It was a piece of magic stick.
3.
(a) False
(b) True.
4.
(a) Raman offered to carry the sage across the river.
(b) The old sage looked sad and worried.
Or
(i) delighted — happy/glad
(ii) deny — refuse.

(3) Sandeep moved on with the old sage. When they came to a desert, they sat down for some rest. The old sage said to Sandeep, “I know you are very tired but I’m very thirsty. Please get me some water”.
“Don’t worry! Please rest here. I’ll find some water for you.” Sandeep set out to find water for the old man. He returned after an hour with some water. The old sage drank the water and blessed Sandeep, “God bless you, son ! Here’s a gift for you.”
Sandeep was delighted. The sage gave him a piece of rope. Sandeep became very happy. He knew he was going to be rewarded. The old sage smiled and said, “It’s a magic rope. It will grant you two wishes. Ask now.”
Sandeep was delighted, “I want a big house.” “Granted.”
A beautiful house appeared.
“What’s your second wish ?” added the sage.
“A field !”, said Harry excitedly. “Granted !”

1. Who brought water for the sage ?
साधु के लिए पानी कौन लाया?

2. How many wishes could the magic rope grant ?
जादुई रस्सी कितनी इच्छाएँ पूरी कर सकती थी?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) On the way the sage felt hungry.
(b) Sandeep asked for a beautiful house for his first wish.

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) The sage gave Sandeep ……… as a gift.
(b) Sandeep became happy because he was going to be ……….
Or
Write the meanings of the following words in English : (any two) excitedly, grant, wish
Answer:
1. Sandeep brought water for the sage.
2. The magic rope could grant two wishes.
3.
(a) False
(b) True.
4. (a) The sage gave Sandeep a magic rope as a gift.
(b) Sandeep became happy because he was going to be rewarded.
Or
eagerly, fulfil, desire.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

Use Of Words And Phrases in Sentences

1. Deny – He denied me food.
2. Wish – His wish came true.
3. Grant – All his wishes were granted.
4. Summoned – The king summoned his minister to his court.
5. Approached – The beggar approached the langar house for food.
6. Worth – You are not worth this big house.
7. Snatched – All his awards were snatched from him.
8. Appeared – All of a sudden a beautiful girl appeared from no where.
9. Word – He did not keep his word.
10. Delighted – He was delighted to- win the race.

Word-Meanings

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers 3

The Old Sage and the Brothers Summary in Hindi

Long time ago…..knew no bound.

बहुत समय पहले एक अमीर किसान ने अपने तीन आलसी पुत्रों-हैरी (Harry), रमन तथा संदीप को बुलाया और कहा, “मैं बूढ़ा हो चुका हूँ। मैंने अपनी सम्पत्ति को तुम्हारे बीच में बांटने का निर्णय लिया है। जैसा कि तुम जानते हो मेरे पास तीन खेत और तीन घर हैं। तुम में से प्रत्येक को एक खेत और एक घर मिलेगा, यदि तुम यह सिद्ध करोगे कि तुम उसके योग्य हो।” तीनों पुत्र हैरान थे। वे चिल्लाए, “पिता जी, आप का क्या अर्थ है ?” किसान ने कहा, “ये खेत और घर मेरी कड़ी मेहनत का फल हैं। तुम तीनों बड़े ही आलसी हो। मैं चाहता हूँ कि तुम तीनों कोई काम ढूंढो।

ठछः मास के बाद अपनी आमदनी लेकर मेरे पास वापिस आओ। मैं निणय करूंगा कि क्या तुम मेरे द्वारा कड़ी मेहनत से अर्जित सम्पत्ति पाने के योग्य हो।” तीनों भाई काम की तलाश में निकल पड़े। रास्ते में वे बरगद के एक वृक्ष के नीचे आराम करने के लिए बैठ गए। जब वे खाना खा रहे थे तभी एक वृद्ध साधु उनके पास आया।

उसने कहा, “मैं भूखा हूं। क्या तुम मुझे खाने के लिए कुछ दे सकते हो ?” हैरी (Harry) ने उसे एक चपाती दे दी। साधु ने खुशी-खुशी उसे खा लिया और बोला, “पुत्र ! ईश्वर तुम्हारा भला करे। तुम्हारे लिए एक उपहार है।” हैरी खुश हो गया। साधु ने उसे कपड़े का एक टुकड़ा दिया।हैरी चिढ़ कर बोला, “यह क्या है ? क्या तुम मेरे साथ मज़ाक कर रहे हो ?”

साधु मुस्कराया और बोला, “यह एक जादुई कपड़ा है। यह तुम्हारी दो इच्छाएं पूरी करेगा। अब मांगो।” हैरी अत्यधिक खुश होकर बोला, “मुझे एक बड़ा घर चाहिए।” “प्रदान किया !” एक सुन्दर घर प्रकट हो गया। साधु ने पूछा, “तुम्हारी दूसरी इच्छा क्या है ?” हैरी ने उत्साह से कहा, “दस गाय।” “दे दी।” दस गाय न जाने कहां से प्रकट हो गईं। हैरी की खुशी का कोई ठिकाना न रहा।

Then the old sage………………Raman confidently.

तब वृद्ध साधु ने कहा, “मुझे वचन दो कि जब कभी भी कोई गरीब आदमी तुमसे एक कप दूध मांगेगा तो तुम इन्कार नहीं करोगे।” युवक ने कहा, “यह एक सज्जन पुरुष का वचन है। वह दूध, मक्खन, दही, मिठाई में से किसी चीज़ की भी इच्छा प्रकट करेगा, मैं इंकार नहीं करूंगा।” वृद्ध साधु मुस्कराया, “अपना वचन मत तोड़ना।” हैरी ने भरोसा दिलाया, “मैं नहीं तोडंगा।”

दूसरे दो भाई वृद्ध साधु के साथ आगे बढ़ गए। वे तब तक चलते रहे जब तक कि वे एक नदी पर नहीं पहुंच गए। वृद्ध साधु उदास और चिंतित दिखाई देने लगा। “ओह ! यहां तो कोई नाव नहीं है। मैं नदी कैसे पार करूंगा ?” रमन ने उदारता से कहा, “चिंता मत करो। मैं तुम्हारी मदद करूंगा। मैं आपको अपनी पीठ पर ले जाऊंगा।” नदी पार करने के पश्चात् वे तीनों आराम करने के लिए बैठ गए।

साधु ने रमन का धन्यवाद किया और कहा, “पुत्र! ईश्वर तुम्हारा भला करे। तुम्हारे लिए एक उपहार है।” रमन खुश हो गया। साधु ने उसे छड़ी का एक टुकड़ा दिया। रमन हैरान रह गया। “यह क्या है ?” साधु ने कहा, “यह एक जादुई छड़ी है। यह तुम्हारी दो इच्छाएं पूरी करेगी। अब मांगो।” रमन खुश हो गया। उसने कहा, “मुझे एक बड़ा घर चाहिए।” “प्रदान किया !” एक सुन्दर घर प्रकट हो गया। साधु ने आगे कहा, “तुम्हारी दूसरी इच्छा क्या है ?” रमन ने उत्सुकता से कहा, “एक मुर्गी फ़ार्म।” “प्रदान किया !” एक मुर्गी पालन फ़ार्म न जाने कहां से प्रकट हो गया।

रमन की खुशी का कोई ठिकाना न रहा। तब वृद्ध साधु ने कहा, “मुझे वचन दो कि जब कभी भी कोई गरीब आदमी तुमसे एक अंडा मांगेगा तो तुम मना नहीं करोगे।”

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

युवक ने कहा, “यह एक सज्जन पुरुष का वचन है और वह अंडे, आमलेट, अंडे का हलवा में से किसी भी चीज़ की इच्छा प्रकट करेगा, मैं इंकार नहीं करूंगा।” वृद्ध साधु ने मुस्कराते हुए कहा, “अपना वचन मत तोड़ना।” रमन ने दृढ़ता से कहा, “मैं ऐसा नहीं करूंगा।”

Sandeep moved on… ………..”Granted!”

संदीप वृद्ध साधु के साथ चलता रहा। जब वे एक मरुस्थल में पहुँचे तो नीचे बैठ कर आराम करने लगे। वृद्ध साधु ने संदीप से कहा, “मैं जानता हूँ कि तुम थके हुए हो परन्तु मुझे बहुत प्यास लगी है। कृपया पानी ले आओ।”
“आप चिंता न करें। कृपया यहां आराम करें। मैं आपके लिए पानी की तलाश करता हूं।” संदीप वृद्ध साधु के लिए पानी तलाशने के लिए निकल पड़ा। वह एक घण्टे के बाद पानी लेकर लौटा। वृद्ध साधु ने पानी पिया और संदीप को आशीर्वाद दिया, “पुत्र, ईश्वर तुम्हारा भला करे! तुम्हारे लिए एक उपहार है।”

संदीप प्रसन्न हो गया। साधु ने उसे रस्सी का एक टुकड़ा दिया। संदीप खुश हो गया। वह जानता था कि उसे उपहार मिलने वाला है। वृद्ध साधु मुस्कराया और कहा, “यह एक जादुई रस्सी है। यह तुम्हारी दो इच्छाएं पूरी करेगी। अब मांगो।”
संदीप प्रसन्न था, “मुझे एक बड़ा घर चाहिए।” “प्रदान किया।” एक सुन्दर घर प्रकट हो गया। साधु ने आगे कहा, “तुम्हारी दूसरी इच्छा क्या है ? ” संदीप ने उत्सुकता से कहा, “एक खेत!” “प्रदान किया!” एक खेत न जाने कहां से प्रकट हो गया। संदीप की खुशी का ठिकाना न रहा।

तब वृद्ध साधु ने कहा, “मुझे वचन दो कि जब कभी भी कोई गरीब आदमी तुमसे खाने के लिए कुछ मांगेगा तो तुम इंकार नहीं करोगे।”
युवक ने कहा, “यह एक सज्जन पुरुष का वचन है। वह चावल, गेहूं, सब्जियां, फल में से किसी भी चीज़ की इच्छा प्रकट करेगा, मैं इंकार नहीं करूंगा।” वृद्ध साधु मुस्कराया, अपना वचन मत तोड़ना।”

संदीप ने वचन देते हुए कहा, “मैं ऐसा नहीं करूंगा।” बूढ़ा साधु अपनी यात्रा पर निकल पड़ा। कुछ दिनों के बाद संदीप ने अपने भाइयों से मिलने का निश्चय किया क्योंकि उसे उनकी याद आ रही थी। घर, गायें, मुर्गी फ़ार्म और उसके भाई सब गायब हो चुके थे। वह उन्हें ढूंढ़ नहीं सका। जब वह वहां खड़ा था आश्चर्यचकित था, उसने साधु को अपनी ओर आते देखा। साधु ने उसे बताया, “तुम्हारे भाइयों ने अपना वचन नहीं निभाया। उन्होंने ग़रीबों और जरूरतमंदों की मदद नहीं की। इसलिए जो कुछ भी उन्हें दिया गया था, छिन गया। तुम अपने वचन पर खरे उतरे। इसलिए जब तक तुम अपने वचन को याद रखोगे, आनंद करते रहोगे।

Retranslation From English to Hindi

1. A rich farmer summoned his three lazy sons.
एक अमीर किसान ने अपने तीन आलसी पुत्रों को बुलाया।

2. I have grown old.
मैं बूढ़ा हो चुका हूँ।

3. I own three fields and three houses.
मेरे पास तीन खेत और तीन घर हैं।

4. The three sons were surprised.
तीनों पुत्र हैरान थे।

5. I want three of you to find some work.
मैं चाहता हूँ कि तुम तीनों कोई काम ढूंढ़ो।

6. The three brothers set out in search of work.
तीनों भाई काम की तलाश में निकल पड़े।

7. The sage ate it happily..
साधु ने खुशी-खुशी उसे खा लिया।

8. The sage gave him a piece of cloth.
साधु ने उसे कपड़े का एक टुकड़ा दिया।

9. It’s a magic cloth.
यह एक जादुई कपड़ा है।

10. I want a big house.
मुझे एक बड़ा घर चाहिए।

11. The old sage looked sad and worried.
वृद्ध साधु उदास और चिंतित दिखाई देने दिया।

12. I’ll carry you on my back.
मैं आपको अपनी पीठ पर ले जाऊंगा।

13. Here is a gift for you.
तुम्हारे लिए एक उपहार है।

14. A poultry farm appeared out of nowhere
एक मुर्गी पालन फ़ार्म न जाने कहां से प्रकट हो गया।

15. I know you are tired.
मैं जानता हूँ कि तुम थके हुए हो।

16. It’s a gentleman’s promise.
यह एक सज्जन पुरुष का वचन है।

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 4 The Old Sage and the Brothers

17. The old sage set out on his journey.
बूढ़ा साधु अपनी यात्रा पर निकल पड़ा।

18. You were as good as your word.
तुम अपने वचन पर खरे उतरे।

English Guide for Class 8 PSEB Prose

Charge for Love Question Answer Class 8 English Solutions Chapter 6 PSEB Solutions

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class English Book Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Class 8th English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love Question Answers

Charge for Love Class 8 Questions and Answers

Activity 1.

Look up the following words in a dictionary. You should seek the following information about the words and put them in your WORDS notebook.
1. Meaning of the word as used in the lesson (adjective/noun/verb. etc.)
2. Pronunciation (The teacher may refer to the dictionary or a mobile phone for correct pronunciation.)
3. Spellings.

sign board advertise intention set about
sweat handful delight stirring
hobbling veterinarian hip socket brace
twisted crippled worth cents

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love

Vocabulary Expansion

Activity 2.

Write the meaning of the following phrasal verbs from their context in the given space.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love 1

Activity 3

Choose the correct option to answer the following questions.

Question 1.
What did the shop owner write on the sign board ?
(a) ‘Come and Buy Puppies’
(b) Free Puppies
(c) Looking For My Lost Puppy
(d) ‘Puppies for Sale’
Answer:
(d) ‘Puppies for Sale’.

Question 2.
What was the name of the mother of the puppies ?
(a) Holly
(b) Dolly
(c) Paula
(d) Peppy.
Answer:
(b) Dolly.

Question 3.
How many puppies were there to choose from?
(a) three
(b) five
(c) four
(d) one.
Answer:
(b) five.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love

Question 4.
Which puppy did the boy pick ?
(a) the one with black and white spots
(b) the one with a limp
(c) the one with shaky eyes
(d) the one with big ears.
Answer:
(b) the one with a limp.

Question 5.
Why did the boy pick the puppy with a limp ?
(a) He could empathize with its condition.
(b) The shop owner said he’d give it for free.
(c) He thought it was very cute.
(d) The puppy showed him more affection.
Answer:
(d) The puppy showed him more affection.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love

Question 6.
Why did the shop owner want the boy to take the puppy for free?
(a) He felt that he should not put a price on love.
(b) He felt that the boy was too small to pay.
(c) The puppy would be a burden on him due to its limp.
(d) He thought that he would have to spend a lot of money on its regular treatment.
Answer:
(d) He felt that he should not put a price on love.

Activity 4.

Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Who approached the owner of the shop ?
दुकान मालिक के पास कौन गया ?
Answer:
A little boy approached the owner of the shop.

Question 2.
What was the owner charging for healthy puppies ?
दुकान मालिक स्वस्थ पिल्लों का कितना मूल्य ले रहा था ?
Answer:
For healthy puppies the owner was charging from $ 30 to $.50 dollars.

Question 3.
How much money did the boy have ?
लड़के के पास कितने पैसे थे ?
Answer:
The boy had 2.37 dollars.

Question 4.
What problem did the lame puppy have ?
लंगड़े पिल्ले को क्या समस्या थी ?
Answer:
The lame puppy could neither run nor play.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love

Question 5.
Which puppy was chosen by the little boy and why?
लड़के ने कौन-सा पिल्ला चुना और क्यों ?
Answer:
The boy chose crippled puppy because it showed him more affection.

Question 6.
Why did the shop owner agree to give the puppy for free?
दुकान मालिक पिल्ला मुफ्त में देने को क्यों तैयार हो गया ?
Answer:
He agreed to this because there is no charge for love.

Activity 5.

Put a tick (✓) or a cross (✗) against each sentence.

1. The shop owner wanted to sell kittens. ( )
2. The shop owner wanted to sell puppies. ( )
3. The boy was an athlete and needed a pet to exercise with. ( )
4. One of the puppies was blind. ( )
5. The boy had enough money to buy four pets. ( )
6. The shop owner insisted that the boy might take the puppy for free. ( )
7. The boy had a crippled leg. ( )
8. The boy initially came looking for a horse. ( )
Answer:
1. ✗
2. ✓
3. ✗
4.✗
5. ✗
6. ✓
7. ✓
8. ✗

Comprehension Passage

Dengue is a viral disease. It spreads through the bite of an Aedes mosquito. This mosquito breeds in stagnant water kept in buckets, coolers, pots, etc. Therefore, we must empty all the buckets, coolers, pots so that the larvae of the Aedes mosquito is not able to breed around us. Also, when the mosquito bites a person suffering from dengue, the dengue virus enters the blood of that mosquito. After about one week, when this mosquito bites a healthy person, the dengue virus enters the blood of that person and infects him. The platelet count of that person goes very low. Other symptoms of dengue usually begin to show four to six days after infection. The symptoms last for up to ten days. The symptoms are :

  • sudden high fever
  • severe headache
  • pain behind the eyes
  • severe joint and muscle pain
  • fatigue
  • nausea
  • vomiting
  • skin rash which appears two to five days after the onset of fever
  • mild bleeding (such as nose bleeding, bleeding gums or easy bruising)

You should therefore rest, drink plenty of fluids and see your doctor regularly. The doctor can diagnose dengue infection with a blood test. The best way to prevent the disease is to prevent mosquito bites by wearing long sleeves clothes so that the infected mosquito is unable to bite.

Activity 6.

Answer the following questions on the basis of the above passage.

1. How does dengue spread ?
2. How can you prevent dengue ?
3. What are the symptoms of dengue ?
4. Choose the correct option:
(a) The symptoms of dengue last upto …………… days
(i) two to five
(ii) upto ten
(iii) upto eight
(iv) four to six.

(b) The symptoms of dengue are :
(i) high fever
(ii) severe headache
(iii) fatigue
(iv) all of these.
Answer:
1. Dengue spreads through the bite of Aedes mosquito.
2. We can prevent dengue by not allowing the Aedes mosquito to breed around us. We should also save ourselves.
3. The symptoms are :

  • sudden high fever
  • severe headache
  • pain behind the eyes
  • severe joint pain and muscle pain
  • fatigue
  • nausea
  • vomitting
  • skin rash which appears two to five days after the onset of fever.
  • mild bleeding (nose bleeding or gums bleeding).

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love

4.
(a) (i) two to five.
(b) (iv) all of these.

Learning Language

Past Tense and Future Tense

In this chapter, we will continue with tenses. In the previous chapter, we did the Present tense. Now let’s look at Past tense and Future tense.

Past Tense

The Simple Past Tense or the Past Indefinite is used :

(a) to express that something was done or took place in the past time
Usually adverbs and adverb phrases like ‘yesterday’, ‘ago’, ‘last week’, “last month’, ‘last year’, etc. are associated with Simple Past Tense. For example :

  • I saw him yesterday.
  • He passed the exam last year.
  • She was born in 1990.
  • He died in 1992.

(b) to express a habitual action in the past, for example :

  • As a child I played cricket.
  • I was the captain of my team.

(c) to express an action actually going on at the past time stated, for example :

  • While they bathed (were bathing), we fished (were fishing).

Past Continuous Tense

It is used to indicate that the action was still going on in the past time referred to. For example :

  • When we reached there, she was singing.
  • When you arrived, they were having lunch.
  • She was cooking when the telephone rang.

Past Perfect:

Tenselt is used to denote an action which had been completed at some point in the past time before another action was commenced. For example :

  • The train had left when we reached the station.
  • The patient had died before the doctor arrived.
  • The sun had set before we reached home.

Past Perfect Continuous Tense

It is used to indicate that an action had continued for a certain time previous to the point of time named

  • We had been waiting for you for two hours when you came.
  • I had been writing for an hour when you came to see me.

Activity 7.

Fill in the blanks with the Simple Past Tense forms of the words given in the brackets :

Bahadur Singh smiled. He tossed his revolver in the air and …………….. (catch) it by the handle. He …………….. (take) a careful aim at an empty sardine can and ……………… (fire) another six shots. The bullets ……………. (go) through into the earth kicking up whiffs of dust. His Alsatian dog …………….. (begin) to bark with excitement. He ……………. (leap) up with a growl and ……………… (run) down the canal embankment. He …………… (sniff) at the tin and ………………. (take) it up in his mouth and ……..10…… (run) back with it and ……………… (lay) it at his master’s feet.
Answer:
1. caught 2. took, 3. fired, 4. went, 5. began, 6. leapt, 7. ran, 8. sniffed, 9. took, 10. ran, 11. laid.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love

Activity 8.

Fill in the blanks with the Simple Past, Past Continuous, Past Perfect forms of the verbs given in the brackets.

1. I ………….. an elephant on the way back home. (see)
2. Did he ……………… a letter to his father ? (write)
3. He ……………… to read when he was three. (learn)
4. When I saw him, he …………. a blue shirt. (wear)
5. ……………… they ……………… out yesterday ? (go)
6. The scooter …………….. a lot of money. (cost)
7. The First World War …………….. in 1919. (end)
8. When I met Aradhya, she ……………… at the bus stop. (wait)
9. Reema . ……….. first in the last test. (not stand)
10. Children ……………. away when they ……………. the policeman. (run, see)
11. The plane ………………. when we reached the airport. (leave )
12. Ramesh …………….. home when I phoned him. (return)
13. …………….. he ……………… his old car before he bought a new one ? (sell).
14. The children ……………… before I came home. (sleep).
15. The film had already begun when we ……………… the theatre. (reach)
16. The teacher … the book before the examination began. (finish)
17. The robber had run away before the police ………………. . (come)
18. Tom ……………… sleepy after having a good lunch. (feel)
19. I …………….. the message before you came. (receive)
20. He ………………. for India last year. (play)
Answer:
1. saw
2. was, writing
3. learnt
4. was wearing
5. Did, go
6. cost
7. ended
8. was waiting
9. did not stand
10. run, saw
11. had left
12. had returned
13. Had, sold
14. had slept
15. reached
16. had finished
17. came
18. felt
19. had received
20. played.

Future Tense

Simple Future Tense:

It denotes an action that is about to take place or an action that will take place in the future. For example :

  • I shall do it now. (at once, immediately)
  • We shall go there next week.
  • Vandana will come here at 6 o’clock.

Future Continuous Tense:

It denotes an action going on at some point in the future timė.
For example :

  • She will be singing then.
  • I shall be taking my examination tomorrow at this time.

Future Perfect Tense:

It denotes that an action will be completed at some point of time in the future. For example :

  • I shall have done my work before you come.
  • The play will have begun before you get to the theatre.
  • They will have spent all their money by then.

Future Perfect Continuous Tense:

It indicates that the action, whether finished or unfinished will have been in progress for sometime.
For example :

  • We shall have been playing for three hours when you come here.
  • Ashok will have been living in Japan for 10 years.

Activity 9

Put the verbs into the correct form (Simple Future).

Use ‘will. Ashu asked a fortune teller about her future. Here is what he told her :

1. You …………… (earn) a lot of money.
2. You ………………. (travel) around the world.
3. You ……………… (meet) lots of interesting people.
4. Everybody ……………… (adore) you.
5. You ….. (not / have) any problems.
6. Many people …………….. (serve) you.
7. They …………….. (anticipate) your wishes.
8. There ……………… (not / be) anything left to wish for.
9. Everything ……………… (be) perfect.
10. But all these things …………….. (happen) only if you marry me.
Answer:
1. will earn
2. will travel
3. will meet
4. will adore
5. will not have
6. will. serve
7. will anticipate
8. will be not
9. will be
10. will happen.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love

Activity 10.

Fill in the blanks using the correct form of the verb given in the brackets.

1. I was not feeling well. So I ……………. much. (not eat)
2. It was so cold at Almora, even water in the taps ……………… (freeze)
3. She assures me that she ………………. me in my work. (help).
4. We ……………… to Mumbai last week. (go)
5. I …………….. Bihar before the earthquake occurred. (leave)
6. He . …… home before the sun sets. (reach)
7. Dinesh ………………. if you invite him. (come)
8. At this time next Monday we ………….. your birthday. (celebrate)
9. When she visits school next month, I ………………. there for 10 years. (teach)
10. The inter school hockey tournament ……………. next Monday. (begin)
Answer:
1. will not eat
2. freeze
3. will help
4. went
5. had left
6. will have reached
7. will come
8. will be celebrating
9. will have been teaching
10. begins/will begin.

Learning to Listen

Activity 11.

You will listen to a voicemail message on your father’s mobile phone. Your father is in Delhi and has forgotten to take his mobile phone. He has another mobile phone with him. Make notes of what you hear. Expand the notes into a proper message that you will send him on his other mobile phone.

Main points of Voicemail Message Text Message
Mohan Kumar from Bell Digital
Some of our products in the market
Demon in your office
Call when back
Phone No…………….
Send your e-mail
New brochure prices will be sent

I wanted to give you some information about our new products. We would like to give a demonstration of our new products in your office. Could you please call me when you are back in the office ? My phone number is 0-6-0-8-6-5-2-7-8-2-0.

Also, can you please send me your e-mail ? I would send you the new brochure of our company and information about our prices. My e-mail address is Mohan, that’s M-O-H-AN dot K-U-M-A-R at B-E-L-L hyphen D-I-G-I-T-A-L- dot com.

Learning to Speak

Activity 12.

Look at the pictures of food given below. These foods are from different countries. Identify the food and the country it comes from and speak 5 sentences on any one of the foods.
PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love 2

(Teachers must help students to identify the country, if required.)

Learning to Write

Activity 13.

Write a paragraph about the little boy of the story ‘Charge for Love’ to describe his character. You may write about.
1. his love for animals
2. his confidence
3. physical description
4. sympathetic nature
5. his understanding of self-worth.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love

The little boy is a kind hearted child. He has sympathetic nature. He is affectionate and loves animals. He himself is crippled. So he is very sympathetic toward the crippled puppy. He knows that there are no charges for love. Still he promises to pay the full price of the little dog. He is not ready to take it free of cost. Learning to Use the Language

Activity 14:

Rewrite a part of the story you have read in the form of a short dialogue between the shop owner and the little boy.

Little boy Shop owner Little boy Shop owner Little boy Shop owner Little boy Shop owner Little boy Shop owner Little boy Shop owner Little boy Shop owner Little boy Shop owner Little boy

Little boy: Are you selling your puppies ?
Shop owner: Yes son, do you want to buy a puppy?
Little boy: Yes, very much ! How much are you selling them for ?
Shop onwer: From 30 to 50 dollars each.
Little boy: But I have only 2.37 dollars and have a look on them with that.
Shop owner: With pleasure.
Little boy: Please call them out.
Shop owner: Here is Dolly with her four puppies.
Little boy: What is that stressing in the dog house?
Shop owner: It is a little puppy.
Little boy: Why is it hobbling and limpinge
Shop owner: It has no hip socket. It will only limp. It would always be loved.
Little boy: I want that one.
Shop owner: Why child. It will never play with you…
Little boy: Then look here. I am too lame and crippled. I see affection in its eyes.
Shop owner: You can take it free of cost.
Little boy: I will not. I will pay the full amount what it is worth. I can’t lower it price.

Comprehension Of Passages

Read the following passage and answer the questions given below each :

(1) A shop onwer had some puppies he wanted to sell. He painted a sign board to advertise his intention of selling the pups that said : ‘Puppies For Sale’. He set about nailing in on the wall. Boards like this always haye a way to attracting young children. As he was driving the last nail into the post. A boy saw the board and started walking towards the shop. He approached the owner and asked. “How much are you going to sell the puppies for ?”

The shop owner looked down into the eyes of the little boy “Well !” said the shop owner, as he wiped the sweat off the back of his neck. “These puppies come from fine parents and cost a good deal of money. So I will charge anywhere from $30 to $50 for each puppy.”

1. What did the shop owner want to sell ?
दुकान का मालिक क्या बेचना चाहता था ?

2. Why were the puppies costly, according to the shop owner ?
दुकानदार के अनुसार पिल्ले महंगे क्यों थे ?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) The shop owner did not attend the boy.
(b) The boy wanted to buy a pup.

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) A boy saw the board and started walking …………..
(b) He set about nailing it ………………
Or
Match the words with their meaning :

(i) A good deal purpose
(ii) Intention clear
large

Answer.
1. The shop owner wanted to sell some puppies.
2. According to the shop owner, the puppies were costly because they were go the fine breed (नस्ल).
3.
(a) False
(b) True.
4.
(a) A boy saw the board and started walking towards the shop.
(b) He set about nailing it on the wall.
Or
(i) A good deal
(ii) Intention purpose

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love

(2) The little boy pressed his face against the chain link fence. His eyes danced with delight. As the dogs made their way to the fence, the little boy noticed something else stirring inside the doghouse. Slowly, another little ball appeared; this one noticeably smaller.

Down the ramp it slid. Then in an awkward manner, the little pup began hobbling towards others, doing its best to catch up. Immediately the little boy singled out the hobbling and limping puppy and said, “What’s wrong with that little dog ?”

The shop owner explained that a veterinarian had examined the little puppy and discovered that it didn’t have a hip socket. It would always limp. It would always be lame.
“I want the one,” the little boy said, pointing the lame puppy.

The shop owner knelt down at the boy’s side and said, “Son, you want that puppy. It will never be able to run and play with you like these other dogs would. So if you really want him, I’ll just give it to you.”

1. What did the little boy notice inside the dog house?
लड़के ने कुत्ता-घर के अन्दर क्या बात नोटिस की ?

2. What was wrong with the little pup ?
छोटे पिल्ले को क्या समस्या थी ?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer book :
(a) The little pup slid down the ramp.
(b) The little boy wanted a healthy pup.

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) Slowly and little ball ……
(b) The little boy’s eyes danced with.
Or
Match the words with their meaning :

(i) appeared found
(ii) discovered tested
emerged.

Answer:
1. The little boy noticed something stirring inside the dog-house.
2. The pup had to hip-socked. So it was lame and could not walk properly.
3.
(a) True
(b) False
4.
(a) Slowly another little ball appeared.
(b) The little boy’s eyes danced with delight.
Or
(i) appeared — emerged
(ii) discovered — found.

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love

(3) With tears in his eyes, the shop owner reached down and picked up the little pup. Holding it carefully he handed it on the little boy.
“How much ?” said the little boy.
“No charge, as I said earlier,” answered the shop owner. “These can be no charge for love.”
The little boy got quite upset. He looked straight into the store owner’s eyes, and pointing his finger at him and said, “You are right. There is no charge for love but I cannot lower its wroth by taking it without charge as if it was less than other puppies because it may not run as fast as them. This little dog is worth every bit as much as all the other dogs. I don’t want you to give him to me free of cost. I’ll pay the full price. I’ll give you $2.37 now and 50 cents a month until I have paid in full.”

1. Why did the shop owner want to charge nothing for the little pup ?
दुकानदार छोटे पिल्ले का कुछ भी मूल्य क्यों नहीं लेना चाहता था ?

2. Did the boy buy the pup free of cost ?
क्या लड़के ने पिल्ला मुफ्त में खरीदा ?

3. Choose true and false statements and write them in your answer-book :
(a) They did not want to lower the worth of the pup.
(b) The boy paid $ 50 for the little pup.

4. Complete the following sentences according to the meaning of the passage :
(a) The shop owner reached down and ….
(b) The little boy got ………..
Or
Write the meanings of the following words in English : (Any two)
Revealed, Twisted, Straight.
Answer:
1. He said that there is no charge for love.
The boys wanted to buy that pup out of love.
2. No, he promised to pay its full price.
3.
(a) True
(b) False.
4.
(a) The shop owner reached down and picked up the little pup.
(b) The little boy got quite upset.
Or
revealed – showed, twisted – bent, straight – directly.

Use of words and phrases in sentences

1. Set about – (started) – He set about his work carefully.
2. Revealed – (came to light) – At last the truth was revealed.
3. Upset – (rejected) – He was upset when he lost his job.
4. Understand – (to know) – I don’t understand what you want.
5. Handful – (in a less quantity) – Please give me a handful of sugar.
6. Crippled – (disabled) – Many people became crippled in the war.
7. Wiped – (cleared) – He wiped dirt off his body.
8. Worth – (value) – What is this beautiful picture worth.
9. Stirring – (movement – I can see some stirring in the tree.
10. Delight – (joy) – Helping the needy gives me delight.

Word Meanings

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love 3

Charge for Love Summary in Hindi

A shop owner……….. looked.” he said.
एक दुकानदार के पास कुछ पिल्ले (कुत्ते के बच्चे) थे। वह उन्हें बेचना चाहता था। उसने पिल्लों को बेचने की अपनी इच्छा जाहिर करने के लिए एक साइन बोर्ड बनाया। इसमें लिखा था ‘बिक्री के लिए पिल्ले’। वह इसे दीवार पर कीलों द्वारा लगाने के लिए चल पड़ा। इस प्रकार के बोर्ड सदा छोटे बच्चों को आकर्षित करते हैं। जैसे ही वह

विज्ञापन पर आखिरी कील गाढ़ रहा था, एक बच्चे ने बोर्ड को देखा और दुकान की ओर चल पड़ा। वह मालिक के पास पहुंचा और पूछा, “आप पिल्लों को कितने में बेचना चाहते हैं।” . दुकान के मालिक ने नीचे झुक कर छोटे बच्चे की आंखों में देखा। उसने अपनी गर्दन के पीछे से पसीना पोंछते हुए कहा, “तो सुनो! ये पिल्ले अच्छी नस्ल के हैं और ये काफी कीमती हैं।

इसलिए मैं प्रत्येक का लगभग 30 से 50 डालर के बीच मूल्य लूंगा। बच्चे ने एक क्षण के लिए अपना सिर नीचे कर लिया। तब उसने अपने जेब में नीचे तक हाथ डाला और मुट्ठी भर खुले पैसे निकाल कर दुकान मालिक को आगे बढ़ा दिए। वह बोला, “मेरे पास 2.37 डालर हैं। क्या ये उन्हें देखने भर के लिए काफी हैं ?”

“Sure, said the shop owner …………. that little dog” ?

दुकान मालिक ने कहा, “निस्संदेह ! उसने एक सीटी बजाई। उसने आवाज़ लगाई डॉली यहां आओ।” डॉली कुत्ता-घर से निकली और ढलान पर दौड़ते हुए आगे आई। उसके पीछे-पीछे चार छोटे-छोटे फर वाले गोले आए। – छोटे बच्चे ने अपना चेहरा चेन वाली बाड़ से दबा लिया। उसकी आंखों में खुशी छा गई। जैसे ही कुत्ते बाड़ की ओर चले, छोटे बच्चे का ध्यान-कुत्ता घर में होने वाली कुछ और हलचल पर गया।

धीरे-धीरे एक और छोटा गोला दिखाई दिया, यह काफ़ी छोटा था।वह ढलान पर सरकने लगा। फिर एक अजीब तरीके से वह छोटा पिल्ला लंगड़ाकर अपनी पूरी कोशिश के साथ दूसरों के साथ मिल जाने के लिए चल पड़ा।तुरंत ही छोटे बच्चे ने लंगड़ाते हुए और लड़खड़ाते पिल्ले को चुन लिया और कहा, “उस छोटे कुत्ते को क्या हुआ है ?”

The shop owner ………… a big metal brace.

दुकान मालिक ने विस्तार से बताया कि एक पशु-चिकित्सक ने छोटे पिल्ले की जांच की थी। उसे पता चला कि उसकी हिप सॉकेट नहीं है। यह सदा लंगड़ा कर चलेगा। यह सदा लंगड़ा रहेगा। छोटे बच्चे ने लंगड़े पिल्ले की ओर इशारा करते हुए कहा, “मुझे वही-चाहिए।” दुकान मालिक बच्चे की ओर झुका और बोला, “बेटे, तुम्हें वह पिल्ला चाहिए। यह कभी भी तुम्हारे साथ भाग और खेल नहीं सकेगा जैसा कि ये दूसरे कुत्ते कर सकेंगे। इसलिए यदि तुम्हें सच में यही चाहिए तो मैं तुम्हें ऐसे ही दे दूंगा।”

इसके साथ ही वह छोटा बच्चा बाड़ से पीछे हटा, नीचे आया और अपनी एक टांग की पतलून को ऊपर की ओर मोड़ने लगा। यह करते हुए उसने दिखाया कि उसकी टांग के दोनों ओर स्टील-ब्रेसं (पट्टी) को विशेष रूप से बनाए गए जूते से जोड़ा गया था। उस समय उसकी हैरानी और भी बढ़ गई जब छोटा बच्चा अपनी दूसरी टांग की पतलून को ऊपर मोड़ने लगा। वह अपनी बुरी तरह से मुड़ चुकी अपंग बाईं टांग जो कि एक बड़ी मेटल ब्रेस की मदद से जुड़ी हुई थी, दिखाना चाहता था।

Looking up at ……………… paid in full.”

दुकान मालिक को देखते हुए उसने कहा, “आपने देखा श्रीमान, मैं स्वयं ठीक ढंग से भाग नहीं सकता और इस असहाय छोटे पिल्ले को भी कोई चाहिए होगा जो उसे समझ सके।” दुकान मालिक की आंखों में आंसू आ गए, वह नीचे आया और उसने छोटे पिल्ले को उठाया। उसने उसे छोटे बच्चे को पकड़ाते हुए कहा, ध्यानपूर्वक पकड़ना। छोटे बच्चे ने कहा, “कितने?” दुकान मालिक ने उत्तर दिया, “जैसा कि मैंने पहले कहा था कोई मोल नहीं। प्यार का कोई मोल नहीं।”

PSEB 8th Class English Solutions Chapter 6 Charge for Love

छोटा बच्चा परेशान हो उठा। उसने सीधा स्टोर मालिक की आंखों में देखा और उसकी ओर अंगुली करके कहा, “आप ठीक कह रहे हैं। प्यार का कोई मोल नहीं होता। परन्तु मैं इसको बिना मोल के लेकर इसका महत्त्व कम नहीं करना चाहता क्योंकि यह दूसरे पिल्लों के जैसे तेज़ नहीं भाग सकता। इस छोटे कुत्ते का उतना ही महत्त्व है जितना अन्य सभी कुत्तों का है। मैं नहीं चाहता कि आप इसे मुझे बिना मूल्य के दे दो। मैं इसका पूरा मूल्य दूंगा। मैं 2.37 डालर आपको अभी दूंगा और 50 सेंट हर महीने दूंगा जब तक कि मैं इसका पूरा मूल्य न दे दूं।”

Retranslation from english to hindi

1. A shop owner wanted to sell some puppies. — दुकानदार कुछ पिल्ले बेचना चाहता था।
2. He set about nailing it on the wall. — वह इसे दीवार पर कीलों द्वारा लगाने के लिए चल पड़ा।
3. These puppies come from fine parents. — ये पिल्ले अच्छी नस्ल के हैं।
4. The boy dropped his head for a moment. — बच्चे ने एक क्षण भर के लिए अपना सिर नीचे कर लिया।
5. He pulled out a handful of change. — उसने मुट्ठी भर खुले पैसे निकाले।
6. Is that enough to take a look ? — क्या ये उन्हें देखने भर के लिए काफी हैं ?
7. He let out a whistle. — उसने सीटी बजाई।
8. His eyes danced with delight. — उसकी आंखों में खुशी छा गई।
9. The little boy noticed something else stirring inside the doghouse. — छोटे बच्चे का ध्यान कुत्ता-घर में होने वाली किसी अन्य हलचल पर गया।
10. Down the ramp it slid. — वह ढलान पर सरकने लगा।
11. It didn’t have a hip socket. — उसकी हिप सॉकेट नहीं है।
12. It would always be lame. — यह सदा लंगड़ा कर चलेगा।
13. It will never be able to run and play with you — यह कभी भी तुम्हारे साथ भाग और खेल नहीं सकेगा।
14. The little boy got quite upset. — छोटा बच्चा परेशान हो उठा।
15. I don’t want you to give him to me free of cost.– मैं नहीं चाहता कि आप इसे मुझे बिना मूल्य के दे दो।

English Guide for Class 8 PSEB Prose